2008 Liberty 1st

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 3
4 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
m Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 m Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION ROLLOVER WARNING

This manual has been prepared with the assistance of Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is ground clearance, and a higher center of gravity than
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- unsafe manner, all vehicles can be caused to go out of
tions and recommendations in this manual will help control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. vehicle is out of control it may rollover when some other
vehicles may not.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
aware of all safety warnings. control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
injury. Drive carefully.
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more

each year, and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 1
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label Consult the following table for a description of the
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. this owner manual:
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating 1
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind-
shield. This number also appears on the Automobile Vehicle Identification Number
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 m Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
m Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 m Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 m Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
m Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .22
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate Flip-Up Window . . . . .24 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .25 m Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 m Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
m Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .47
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
m Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . .49
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .50
m Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental ▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The 2
m Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .79 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
either side up. be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
Place the selector lever in “P” (Park). Turn the key to the
ACC position and then push the key and cylinder inward
slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position. Then
remove the key.
Vehicle Key
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), features such as the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof or Sky Slidert 2
(if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, features such as
the power window switches, radio, power sunroof or
Sky Slidert (if equipped), and power outlets will
Ignition Key Positions remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Turn the key to the ACC position and then push the key
feature is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay
and cylinder inward slightly and rotate the key to the
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
LOCK position. Then remove the key.
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
WARNING!
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a key.
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
ignition. A child could operate power windows, position.
other controls, or move the vehicle.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
CAUTION! rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
Always remove the key from the ignition, and lock or unlocked.
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2) longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
engine. viced as soon as possible.
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also NOTE:
2
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the • The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. with some after-market remote starting systems. Use
of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob-
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
lems and loss of security protection.
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light • Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is any other transponder-equipped components on the
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light same key chain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of against the ignition key being used when starting the
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
after two (2) seconds. will not cause interference with this system.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer

System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
dealer.
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot Customer Key Programming
be programmed to any other vehicle. If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new
sentry keys to the system by performing the following
CAUTION! procedure:
Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and 1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the “ON” position for at least 3
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided seconds, but no longer than 15-seconds. Then, turn the
with a four-digit PIN number. Keep the PIN in a secure
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and remove the
location. This number is required for dealer replacement
of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an first key.
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro- 3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
gramming procedure. This procedure consists of pro- Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 15
gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In
key is one, which has never been programmed.
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” have all remaining keys erased from the systems
position and remove the second key. memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch. Turn
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro- 2
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 60
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will General Information
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
then turn off. subject to the following conditions:
The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Keyless Entry • This device may not cause harmful interference.
Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro-
• This device must accept any interference that may be
cedure.
received, including interference that may cause undes-
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do ired operation.
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
for details.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
wheel lock (manual transmission only). This lock pre-
vents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
steering wheel is moved a half turn in either direction The Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) system monitors the
and the key is not in the ignition, the steering wheel will vehicle doors, liftgate, and liftgate flip-up window for
lock. unauthorized entry and ignition for unauthorized opera-
tion.
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel 1/2 If something triggers the alarm, the system will sound
revolution from straight ahead position, turn off the the horn intermittently, flash the headlights and tail-
engine, and remove the key. Rotate the steering wheel lights, and flash the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator
slightly in both directions until the lock engages. Light in the cluster.
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock NOTE: The “Panic” and “Security” alarms are quite
Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly different. Please take a moment to activate the “Panic”
to the right or left to disengage the lock. and the “Security” modes to hear the differences in the
horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage need to know which mode has been activated in order to
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to deactivate it.
Rearming of the System: During this period, opening any door or the liftgate will
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to cancel the arming process. If the system arms success-
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after 3 fully, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will flash
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set. 2
and then the system will rearm itself.
NOTE: For added security, whenever the Security
To Arm the System: Alarm is armed, the HomeLinkt/Garage Door Opener
(if equipped) is disabled as well.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the
vehicle. To Disarm the System:
Either press the Unlock button on the RKE transmitter or
2. Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door
insert a valid sentry key into the ignition lock cylinder
lock switch or the Lock button on the Remote Keyless
and turn the key to the ON position.
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
NOTE:
NOTE: The system will not arm if you lock the doors
• Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung-
with the manual door lock plungers or the driver’s door
ers or the driver’s door lock cylinder will not disarm
lock cylinder.
the system.
3. Close all doors. The Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator
• When the system is armed, the interior power door
Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for
lock switches will not unlock the doors.
about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Fea-
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the tures),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
system will give you a false alarm. If the previously (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
described arming sequence has occurred, the system will
The interior lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds
arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
vehicle. If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door,
switch is turned on.
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the system.
NOTE:
Tamper Alert
• The illuminated entry system will not operate the
If something has triggered the alarm in your absence, the
interior lights if the dimmer control is in the “defeat”
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.
position (extreme downward position).
Check the vehicle for tampering.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
The interior lights will turn on when you use the Remote
liftgate, open the liftgate flip-up window, or activate the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open a door.
panic alarm from distances up to 23 feet (7 meters) using
This feature also turns on the approach lighting (if so a hand held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not
equipped). For details, refer to “Illumination Approach,” be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. However,
the line of transmission must not be blocked with metal
objects when using the transmitter.
NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis- Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
ables all buttons on the transmitter. This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first
press of the Unlock button on the transmitter. To change 2
the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
Vehicle Key following steps:
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate: 1. Press and hold the Lock button on a programmed (i.e.
Press and release the Unlock button on the transmitter functional) transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the Unlock
doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to button while still holding the Lock button.
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on. 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing To Lock the Doors and Liftgate:
the Lock and Unlock buttons on the transmitter. Press and release the Lock button on the transmitter to
lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the lock
its previous setting.
signal.
NOTE: Pressing the Lock button on the transmitter
Sound Horn with Lock
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the Unlock button to
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
deactivate the Security Alarm.
proceed as follows:
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Sound Horn with
when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The
Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Illumination Approach,”
manual.
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Fea-
tures),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Flash Lights with Lock
following steps: The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.
1. Press the Lock button on a programmed (i.e. func-
tional) transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 2
current setting, proceed as follows:
than 10 seconds. Then, press the Panic button while still
holding the Lock button. • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Flash Lights with
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Remote Key Lock,” under 9Personal Settings (Cus-
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic
the Lock button on the transmitter. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
its previous setting. • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: Pressing the Lock button on the transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security 1. Press and hold the Unlock button on a programmed
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated (i.e. functional) transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the Unlock button to longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the Lock
deactivate the Security Alarm. button while still holding the Unlock button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.

WARNING!
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the Lock and Unlock buttons on the transmitter. To avoid injury stand back when opening. Glass will
automatically rise.
NOTE: Pressing the Lock button on the transmitter Using the Panic Alarm
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security NOTE: The “Panic” and “Security” alarms are quite
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated different. Please take a moment to activate the “Panic”
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the Unlock button to and the “Security” modes to hear the differences in the
deactivate the Security Alarm. horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will
To Unlatch the Liftgate Flip-Up Window: need to know which mode has been activated in order to
Press the Rear Release button twice to unlatch the liftgate deactivate it.
flip-up window. To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the Panic button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and turn signal lights will flash, the horn will Programming Additional Transmitters
pulse on and off, and the illuminated entry system will Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
turn on. in this section.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
2
turn it off by pressing the Panic button a second time or contact your dealer for details.
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
Battery Replacement
During the Panic Mode, the door locks and remote The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
keyless entry system will function normally. Panic mode
NOTE:
will not disarm the security system on vehicles so
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
equipped.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
using the transmitter to turn off the panic alarm due to
housing or the printed circuit board.
the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
1. Remove the screw from the transmitter case (if
equipped).
2. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat 3. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
blade tool to pry the two halves of the transmitter case new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal. battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
5. Reinstall and tighten the screw until snug (if
equipped).
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Separating Case Halves
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a
2
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the
batteries is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Remote Start Button
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
targeted range of 328 ft. (100 m).
How To Use Remote Start To Enter Remote Start Mode

All of the following conditions must be met before the Press and release the Remote Start button on
engine will remote start: the RKE transmitter twice. The engine will start
and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
• Gear selector lever in “P” (Park).
mode for a 15-minute cycle.
• Doors closed.
NOTE:
• Hood closed. • For security, power window operation and sunroof or
Sky Slidert operation (if equipped) is disabled when
• Liftgate closed.
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• Hazard switch off.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed). 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch.
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
• Battery at an acceptable charge level. cycle.
• RKE Panic button not pressed. To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode & Drive the Vehicle DOOR LOCKS
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
Manual Door Locks
the Unlock button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
2
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
and turn the switch to the ON position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
in order to drive the vehicle.
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the remote start button one time.
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system
will disable the one-time press of the remote start button
for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start
request.
Manual Lock Plunger

If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
WARNING!
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door. • For personal security and safety in the event of an
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
the liftgate. well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
liftgate. chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and 2
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
Power Door Lock Switch
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
Automatic Door Locks Programming 4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or programming.
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle its previous setting.
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
dance with local laws.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual for details. Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
power door locks if:
the following procedure:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
abled.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
position.
3. The transmission is in “N” (Neutral) or “P” (Park)
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked. 3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
programming.
2
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows: 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec- in accordance with local laws.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
of this manual for details.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
the following procedure: protection door lock system.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition. To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and 1. Open the rear door.
then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK
position.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the child lock NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door
control and rotate it to the lock position. can be opened only by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
Inserting Ignition Key • After engaging the child protection door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move

the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle. 2
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the child lock
control and rotate it to the unlock position.
Inserting Ignition Key

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door

trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
control all the door windows.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in

the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Down Feature

The driver power window switch has an “Auto Down”
Power Window Switches feature. Press the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-
to the first detent and release it when you want the tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Ve-
window to stop. hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
To stop the window from going all the way down during
manual. 2
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
On some models, the driver’s power window switch has
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
an “Auto Up” feature. Pull the window switch up to the
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
second detent, release, and the window will go up
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
automatically.
door will cancel this feature.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening To close the window part way, pull the window switch
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is up to the first detent and release when you want the
programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to window to stop.
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
door will cancel this feature. closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
WARNING!
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Cus- window before closing.
tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual. Window Lockout Switch
NOTE: The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- panel allows you to disable the window control on the
closure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove other doors. To disable the window control on the other
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close doors, press and release the window lock button (setting
the window. it in the down position). To enable the window controls,
press and release the window lock button again (setting
it in the up position).
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second

detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open. 2
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof or Sky Slidert (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
Window Lockout Switch buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
Reset
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky
It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
Slidert open, adjust the sunroof or Sky Slidert opening
auto-up feature. To do so, perform the following procedure:
to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
LIFTGATE NOTE: Use the power door lock switch on either front
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
lift. transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual
door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous

exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Liftgate Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
WARNING!
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front injuries, including fatalities, if you are not properly 2
airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and side buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out
to a window. If you will be carrying children too small for of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used to hold vehicle are buckled up properly.
infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
possible. and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

WARNING!
be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries.
Lap/Shoulder Belts • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de- • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions. not equipped with seats and seat belts.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a properly.
collision, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are
designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a
collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries
in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt.
People belted together can crash into one another in an accident,
hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap
belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high
on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force
in a collision.
Latch Plate To Buckle
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit
your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too will withdraw any slack in the belt.
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug 2
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdo-
men. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. Removing Slack From Belt
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
allow the belt to retract fully. from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
WARNING! that serves you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, folded webbing.
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
Seat Belt Pretensioners
anchorage, try to move it up and down to make sure that
The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped
2
it is locked in position.
with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ collision. These devices improve the performance of the
shoulder belt. seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
anchor point.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
worn snugly and positioned properly.
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
straint Controller (ORC). Like the front airbags, the
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is
latch plate.
severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
both must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Programming

(BeltAlert) The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, and if performing the following steps:
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
NOTE: DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deacti-
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will alert the
vating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle 1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to belt.
chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
seconds or until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert)
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
will be reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove any
with the seat belt buckled. slack in the shoulder belt. 2
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while Anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract outboard seating position. Children 12 years old and
the seat belt. under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success- How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
fully completed the programming.
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
vated by repeating this procedure.
the entire belt is extracted.
NOTE: When the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert)
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
to illuminate as long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuck-
now in the automatic locking mode.
led.
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

WARNING!
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt from the
buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retrac-
(emergency) locking mode. tor” feature or any other seat belt function is not
Energy Management Feature working properly when checked according to the
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy procedures in the Service Manual.
management feature in the front seating positions to help • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the occupant’s chest.
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
WARNING!
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
Seat Belt Extender increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use 2
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so low and snug, and in the recommended seating
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized positions. Remove and store the extender when not
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This needed.
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender, and store it.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the steering
wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal

regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This

may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
The front passenger airbag is also certified to the Federal 2
regulations that define Occupant Classification (refer to
information on Occupant Classification System in this
section).
This vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags to
protect the driver and the front and rear passengers
sitting next to a window. They are located above the side
windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Window Airbag Location
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
Along with the seat belts, the front airbags provide

WARNING!
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
• Do not put anything on or around the front and side Side Curtain Airbags also work with seat belts to im-
curtain airbag covers or attempt to manually open prove occupant protection.
them. You may damage the airbags and you could be
injured because the airbags are no longer functional. The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating. severe collisions. The Side Curtain Airbag will also
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to trigger on the crash side of the vehicle in moderate to
block the location of the side curtain airbag. The area severe side collisions or on both sides of the vehicle in
where the side curtain airbag is located should remain rollover collisions. In certain types of collisions, both the
free from any obstructions.
front and side airbags may be triggered. However, even
• Do not have any accessory items installed which will in collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the seat
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent
attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the protect you properly.
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
for any reason.
when the driver front airbag has; particularly if the
• Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers. These
Occupant Classification System has determined the pas-
items may cause serious injury during inflation.
senger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is
classified in a category other than that of an adult (refer booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear
to information on Occupant Classification System in this seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
section). This could be a child, teenager, or even a small behind them or under their arm.
size adult.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
2
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag. seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
section).
buckled up in the rear seat.
You should read the instructions provided with your
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death 2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
to infants in that position. properly.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in child back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil- inflate.
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning
4. Do not lean against the door or window, airbags will

WARNING!
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door. • Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under “If some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
You Need Assistance” in Section 9 of this manual. Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
• The side curtain airbags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in
the center of the seat.
Airbag System Components • Front Passenger Seat Track Position Sensors

The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front Pas-
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) senger Seat Only
2
• Airbag Warning Light − Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
• Driver Airbag − Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
• Front Passenger Airbag − Weight Sensors
• Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows How The Airbag System Works
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors • The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal, side, or rollover collision is severe enough
• Steering Wheel and Column
to require the airbags to inflate. The front airbag
• Instrument Panel inflators are designed to provide different rates of
airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC.
• Interconnecting Wiring
The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based
• Front Acceleration Sensors on the occupant size. The ORC receives this data from
the Occupant Classification Module (OCM). The ORC
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner and
will detect roll over, but not rear impacts.
Retractor
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic Warning Light” either momentarily or continuously. A
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in single chime will sound if the light comes on again
the START or ON position. These include all of the after initial start up.
items listed above except the Passenger Airbag Disable
(PAD) Indicator Light, the instrument panel, and the WARNING!
steering wheel and column. If the key is in the LOCK
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, Ignoring the “Airbag Warning Light” in your instru-
the airbags are not on and they will not inflate. ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
The ORC also turns on the “Airbag Warning protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
Light” and “PAD Indicator Light” for 6 to 8 on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
first turned ON. After the self-check, the away.
“Airbag Warning Light” will turn off. The “PAD
Indicator Light” will function normally (refer to infor-
mation on Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator • The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
Light in this section). If the ORC detects a malfunction a Federally regulated safety system required for this
in any part of the system, it turns on the “Airbag vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified
in a category other than that of an adult. This could be
a child, teenager, or even a small size adult.
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride

buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
• The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
2
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The “PAD Indi-
cator Light” illuminates the words 9PASS AIR BAG
OFF9 to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the front
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are
placed on the seat, the passenger airbag will not inflate
even though the “PAD Indicator Light” is not illumi- Indicator Light Location
nated.
The “PAD Indicator Light” should not be illuminated
when an adult passenger is properly seated in the
front passenger seat. In this case, the airbag is ready to
be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs. For
all other occupants, the “PAD Indicator Light” will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
is turned off and it will not inflate. If the “PAD Passenger Air-
Indicator Light” is not illuminated, DO NOT assume Front Passenger bag Disable
the airbag is turned off and move the child restraint to Airbag Status
Seat Occupant (PAD) Indicator
the rear seat. A deploying passenger airbag can cause Light
death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant Adult OFF ON
seat. Grocery Bags,
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an Heavy Brief-
Occupant Classification System, children 12 years and cases, and Other ON OFF
Relatively Light
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
Objects
appropriate child restraint.
Empty or Very
OFF* OFF
Small Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system. Objects
hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down
on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult
will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case, because this can also affect occupant classification. Also,
the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn’t
adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position touch the front passenger seat.
(with their feet on or near the floor) in order to be
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
2
properly classified. Reclining the seat back too far may
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
change how an occupant is classified by the OCS.
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
“PAD Indicator Light” is not illuminated when an adult authorized dealer.
is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult occu-
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the “Airbag Warning
pant’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle
Light” (a red light located in the center of the instrument
(like the door or instrument panel), the weight sensors in
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
the seat may not properly classify the occupant. Objects
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center
authorized dealer. The “Airbag Warning Light” is turned
console can prevent the occupant’s weight from being
on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation
measured properly and may result in the occupant being
of the airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS,
improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger
both the “PAD Indicator Light” and the “Airbag Warning
seat back does not touch anything placed on the back seat
Light” are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag
is turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is
lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of driver’s front airbag gas is vented through the vent
the weight sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front
the “PAD Indicator Light” and the “Airbag Warning airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
Light.” Once the lodged object is removed, the fault will of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
be automatically cleared after a short period of time. with your control of the vehicle.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are • The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
located in the center of the steering wheel and the cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
passenger side of the instrument panel. When the ORC classifies the occupant into categories based on the
detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con-
generated to inflate the front airbags. Different airbag troller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
inflation rates are possible, based on collision severity determine whether the front passenger airbag should
and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel inflation during a collision.
separate and fold out of the way, as the bags inflate to
• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes
applied weight and transfers that information to the
to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while
OCM.
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The
• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de- The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
signed to activate only in certain side collisions and ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
rollover events. When the ORC detects a collision ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System 2
the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle or both (OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
sides of the vehicle for a rollover event. A quantity of late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain modifications to the front passenger seat components or
airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the assembly.
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time that it • Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure components in any way.
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
items are positioned in the area where the side curtain
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
side curtain airbag is only about 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) thick
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
when it is inflated.
Mopar.
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need

WARNING!
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
the front passenger seat assembly or its related com- If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
ponents may inadvertently change the airbag deploy- or all of the following may occur:
ment in case of a frontal crash. This could result in
death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if • The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
If A Deployment Occurs They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a moderate- few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver and front immediately.
passenger, and then to immediately deflate.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

WARNING!
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, protect you in another collision. Have the airbags, 2
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, seat belt pretensioner, and seat belt retractor assem-
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, possible. Also, have the Occupant Classification Sys-
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your tem serviced as well.
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the Enhanced Accident Response System
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you. with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following func-
tions:
• Cuts off fuel to the engine.
• Flashes hazard lights.
• Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as Maintaining Your Airbag System
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed. WARNING!
• Unlocks the doors automatically. • Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when
you need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
driven. bumper or vehicle body structure.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The
airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced
airbag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion
needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact your authorized dealer.
• Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video players on the front
passenger seat back. The additional weight may cause the Occupant
Classification System to be unable to classify the front seat passenger
correctly. This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it
is not desired.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be
sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may Event Data Recorder (EDR)
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to 5-seconds of specific vehicle data parameters
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate
(see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to 2
the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment,
for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is
and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration
designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following
data during and/or after air bag deployment or near-
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
promptly:
deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavail-
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers able.
during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is
NOTE:
first turned on.
• A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually in-
interval. dicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant
airbag deployment.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving. • Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com- provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor- ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern- data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora-
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as tion to any third party except when:
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
insurance organizations.
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative), preserved
the company or its designated representative will first
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
4. Otherwise required by law
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded: • Transmission gear selection

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for • Cruise control status
electronically controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• Traction/stability control status 2
• Tire pressure monitoring system status
• Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
Child Restraint
• 9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
cycles and vehicle mileage)
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable) States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
• Impact acceleration and angle
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• Seat belt status
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
• Brake status (service and parking brakes) led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
the rear seats rather than in the front.
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
Infants and Child Restraints

WARNING!
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
required to hold even an infant on your lap can of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
become so great that you could not hold the child, no carriers and “convertible” child seats.
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
size. to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
There are different sizes and types of restraints for weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
children from newborn size to the child almost large infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
child: LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section. more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the 2
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
infants in this position.
lap/shoulder belt.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
as possible.
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or

WARNING!
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind collision. The child could be badly injured or
their back. killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. • A rearward facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag, which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
restraint: collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
2
Standards. The manufacturer also recommends that Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
will use it before you buy it. restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
weight and height limits.
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the structure.
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
not work when you need it.
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
manufacturer’s instructions tell you. having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail- If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
the available attachments provided with your child re- center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-
straint in any vehicle. compatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to “Installing the
The two outboard rear-seating positions have lower
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” and “In-
anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-
stalling Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” in
compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted
this section for typical installation instructions.
lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attach-
ments must be installed in the outboard positions only. Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment. System
NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
two seats share a common lower anchorage. manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back, rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you 2
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
Tether Strap Mounting

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
Latch Anchorages
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-

WARNING!
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a Improper installation of a child restraint to the
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
means of adjusting the tension of the strap. child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the when installing an infant or child restraint.
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat Belt
where you are placing the child restraint and attach the The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
straps as you push the child restraint rearward and the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
belt. However, any seat belt system may loosen with In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
necessary. buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor, pull the
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the 2
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch
release button facing out.
plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is all
extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return to If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to “Automatic to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
Locking Mode” earlier in this section. the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:

WARNING!
Route the tether strap over the seat back and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat. An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether increased head motion and possible injury to the
underneath the headrest and attach the hook to the tether child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
anchor located on the back of the seat. the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Tether Strap Mounting

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
your new vehicle. considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
interpreted as an indication of difficulty. 2
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 SAFETY TIPS
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Transporting Passengers
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. AREA.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people out of the area.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
injured or killed. running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
using a seat belt properly. system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
Lock Your Vehicle system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
value exposed. seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Vehicle
Seat Belts
WARNING!
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
2
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
(CO) follow the safety tips below. a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
• If you are required to drive with the trunk open, webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
make sure that all windows are closed, and the retractor condition, replace the belt.
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Airbag Warning Light
DO NOT use the recirculation mode. The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster Lights
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
Door Latches
able.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
Fluid Leaks
The Vehicle
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
Tires engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for located and corrected immediately.
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 m Hands–Free Communication (UConnectt) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .88
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ UConnectt System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnectt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .91
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . 118 m Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 ▫ Exterior & Interior Lighting Control . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 ▫ Headlights & Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 134
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat ▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With Auto
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
m Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . 134
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Linking & Unlinking The Remote Keyless
(RKE) Transmitter To The Memory Feature . . . 128 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 137
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
▫ Flash To Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 ▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
m Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With Auto ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
m Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 150
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 143
▫ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Enabling & Disabling The System . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
m Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 155
m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 147
▫ Programming HomeLinkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Electronic Speed Control Operation . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 159
▫ Using HomeLinkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkt ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
m Sky Slidert Full Length Open Roof . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Sky Slidert Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Power Top Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
m Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Opening The Sky Slidert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Closing The Sky Slidert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Anti-Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Sky Slidert Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
m Electrical Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 170
m Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

m Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 m Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
m Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . . 180
▫ Front Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . . 181
3
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 m Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 182
m Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the

small control under the mirror to the night position
Inside Day/Night Mirror
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment. Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
Manual Rearview Mirror

Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
3
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

Automatic Dimming Mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
CAUTION! passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped

Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions,
forward, rearward, and normal.
Power Remote Control Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on driver’s door trim
panel.
Power Mirror Switches

Models without Express Window Feature
Press the mirror select button marked L or R and then
press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in
the direction the arrow is pointing.
Models with Express Window Feature Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

Press and release the mirror select button marked L or R An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. The selec- mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
tion will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity to guard cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
against accidentally moving a mirror position following 3
an adjustment.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument
panel to return the power mirrors to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section
for details.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost. Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-Out” Feature — If Equipped voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
The sun visor “slide-on rod” feature allows for additional { “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun. mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
1. Fold down sun visor.
UConnectt system.
2. Unclip visor from center clip.
NOTE: The UConnectt system use requires a cellular
3. Pull the sun visor toward inside rearview mirror to phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
extend. version 0.96 or higher. See UConnectt website for sup-
ported phones.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnectT) —
IF EQUIPPED NOTE: For UConnectt customer support, visit the
following web sites:
NOTE: The sales code RER radio contains an inte-
grated Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) sys- • www.chrysler.com/uconnect
tem. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for • www.dodge.com/uconnect
UConnectt system operating instructions for this radio.
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
UConnectt is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnectt allows you to dial a • or call 1–877–855–8400
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
UConnectt allows you to transfer calls between the with the system at a time. The system is available in
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
Phone Button
phone for private conversation.
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
The UConnectt phone book enables you to store up to 32 for the system (depending on the type of
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a mirror and radio equipped), and either the
3
separate 32-name phone book accessible only in that radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
language. This system is driven through your Blue- (Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button)
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnectt that will enable you to access the system.
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
Voice Recognition Button
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
Actual button location may vary with radio.
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
The individual buttons are described in the
nectt works no matter where you stow your cellular
“Operation” section.
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnectt system. The UConnectt system The UConnectt system can be used with any Hands-Free
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system. Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See UCon-
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used nectt website for supported phones. If your cellular
phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile)
you may not be able to use any UConnectt features. • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone the beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt or another
manufacturer for details. prompt.
The UConnectt system is fully integrated with the vehi- • For certain operations, compound commands can be
cle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnectt system used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control 9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
switch), if so equipped.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from combined form of the voice command is given. You
the UConnectt system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios. part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
Operation
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnectt
combined form command into two voice commands:
system and to navigate through the UConnectt menu
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnectt system works best when you talk in a
UConnectt system prompts. You will be prompted for a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
specific command and then guided through the available
sitting eight feet away from you.
options.
Voice Command Tree Pair (Link) UConnectt System to a Cellular Phone

Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section. To begin using your UConnectt system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. The UCon-
the beep. The UConnectt system will play all the options nectt website may also provide detailed instructions for
3
at any prompt if you ask for help. pairing.
To activate the UConnectt system from idle, simply press The following are general phone to UConnectt System
the “Phone” button and follow audible prompts for pairing instructions:
directions. All UConnectt system sessions begin with a
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
press of the “Phone” button on the radio control head.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
Cancel Command
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say 9Cancel9 and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • When prompted, after the beep, say 9Pair a Phone9 and
few instances the system will take you back to the follow the audible prompts.
previous menu.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
need to remember this pin number after the initial cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
pairing process. Connectivity9).
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number
give the UConnectt system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest • System will prompt you to say the number you want
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to call.
your UConnectt system. However, at any given time,
• For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9 The phone
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
number that you enter must be of valid length and
your UConnectt System. The priority allows the
combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
UConnectt system to know which cellular phone to
hicle was purchased, the UConnectt limits the user
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnectt
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
valid phone number has ten digits.
• The UConnectt system will confirm the phone num- • The UConnectt system will confirm the name and
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the then dial the corresponding phone number, which
display of certain radios. may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name Add Names to Your UConnectt Phonebook
• Press the “Phone” button to begin. NOTE: Adding names to phone book is recommended 3
when vehicle is not in motion.
“Call.9 • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
you want call. 9Phonebook New Entry.9
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
the name of the person you want to call. For example, long names helps the voice recognition and it is
you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ- recommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or
ously stored name entry in the UConnectt phone 9Robert9 instead of 9Bob.9
book. Refer to 9Add Names to Your UConnectt Phone-
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
book,9 to learn how to store a name in the phone book. 9Home,9 9Work,9 9Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phone book
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone owners’
phone book entry that you are adding. manual for specific instructions on how to send these
entries from your phone.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more NOTE:
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the • Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans-
main menu. fers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
The UConnectt system will allow you to enter up to 32 • Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
names in the phone book with each name having up to are already connected to any system via Bluetooth,
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each and you may see a message on the phone display that
language has a separate 32-name phone book accessible the Bluetooth link is busy. In this case, the user must
only in that language. first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to
the UConnectt and then send the address book entry
Phonebook Download
via Bluetooth. Please see your phone owners’ manual
UConnectt allows the user to download entries from
for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth
their phone via Bluetooth. To use this feature, press the
connection.
“Phone” button and say “Phonebook Download.” Sys-
tem prompts “Ready to accept vcard entry via Blue- • If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it
tooth…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook will be use only the first 24 characters.
entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object
Edit Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook 9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
NOTE: Editing names in the phone book is recom-
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mended when vehicle is not in motion.
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
• Press the “Phone” button to begin. work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say Delete Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook
3
9Phonebook Edit.9
NOTE: Editing phone book entries is recommended
• You will then be asked for the name of the phone book when vehicle is not in motion.
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
9Phonebook Delete.9
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
phone book entry that you are editing.
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book, to delete. You can either say the name of a phone book
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phone book
return to the main menu. from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the 9Voice Recognition9 button • After confirmation, the phone book entries will be
while the UConnectt system is playing the desired deleted.
entry and say 9Delete.9
• Note that only the phone book in the current language
• After you enter the name, the UConnectt system will is deleted.
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
List All Names in the UConnectt Phonebook
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete. • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• Note that only the phone book entry in the current • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
language is deleted. 9Phonebook List Names.9
Delete All Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook • The UConnectt system will play the names of all the
phone book entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the 9Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
9Phonebook Erase All.9
name, and say 9Call.9
• The UConnectt system will ask you to verify that you
NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
operations at this point.
• The UConnectt system will then prompt you as to the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
number designation you wish to call. single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
• The selected number will be dialed. Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
Phone Call Features
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
The following features can be accessed through the
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
3
UConnectt system if the feature(s) are available on your
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
on hold and answer the incoming call.
accessed through the UConnectt system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you NOTE: The UConnectt system compatible phones in
have. market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the Making a Second Call while Current Call in
UConnectt system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- Progress
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
call. Press ’Phone’ button to accept the call. To reject the press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Dial9 or
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phone book
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while Conference Call
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
refer to 9Toggling Between Calls.9 To combine two calls, hold), press and hold the “Phone” button until you hear
refer to 9Conference Call.9 a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the 8Phone’ button until you Three-Way Calling
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recogni-
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the tion” button while a call is in progress and make a second
“Phone” button until you hear a single beep. phone call as described under 9Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has
Toggling Between Calls
established, press and hold the “Phone” button until you
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
press the “Phone” button until you hear a single beep
been joined into one conference call.
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one Call Termination
time. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “Phone”
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell switched to off. Call continuation functionality available
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
and hold the “Phone” button until you hear a single
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
beep.
on the UConnectt system either until the call ends or
Redial until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnectt system and transfer of the
3
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
9Redial.9
on the UConnectt system for certain duration, after
• The UConnectt system will call the last number that which the call is automatically transferred from the
was dialed on your cellular phone. UConnectt system to the mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the • An active call is automatically transferred to the
UConnectt system. mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnectt system after the vehicle ignition key has been
UConnectT System Features Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Language Selection
reachable:
To change the language that the UConnectt system is
using, • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnectt system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Emergency9 and the UConnectt system will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
voice commands will be in that language.
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: After every UConnectt language change opera-
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
tion, only the language specific 32-name phone book is
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
and usable across all languages.
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnectt system does slightly lower your chances Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
phone directly. the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon- Paging
nectt system to allow use of this vehicle feature in To learn how to page refer to 9Working with Automated
emergency situations when the cell phone has network Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
3
coverage and stays paired to the UConnectt system. certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnectt system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance, Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
9Towing Assistance.9
This method is used in instances where one generally has
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800- navigating through an automated telephone system.
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
You can use your UConnectt system to access a voice-
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
City in Mexico).
service or automated customer service. Some services say “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
require immediate response selection, in some instances, name or number, say the name of the phonebook entry
that may be too quick for use of UConnectt system. you wish to send. The UConnectt will then send the
corresponding phone number associated with the phone-
When calling a number with your UConnectt system
book entry as tones over the phone.
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push NOTE:
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you • You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
wish to enter followed by the word 9Send.9 For example, network configurations, this is normal.
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
• Some paging and voicemail systems have system
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the “Voice Recognition”
timeout settings too short that may not allow the use
button and say 93 7 4 6 # Send.9 Saying a number, or
of this feature.
sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send9 is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service Barge In - Overriding Prompts
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager. The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
You can also send stored UConnectt phonebook entries
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager
prompt is playing 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
a{,9 you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and status when you are attempting to make a phone call
say 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to using UConnectt. The status is given for roaming, net-
listen to the rest of the voice prompt. work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnectt sys- keypad and still use the UConnectt system (while dial-
3
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). ing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnectt system will audio system. The UConnectt system will work the same
play the current confirmation prompt status and you as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
will be given the choice to change it.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
Phone and Network Status Indicators dial ring to the UConnectt system to play it on the
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
your cell phone, the UConnectt system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
may feel that the call did not go through even though the Advanced Phone Connectivity
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
hear the audio.
The UConnectt system allows on going calls to be
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off) transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnectt
When you mute the UConnectt system, you will still be system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
able to hear the conversation coming from the other ing call from your UConnectt paired cellular phone to
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In the UConnectt system or vice-versa, press the “Voice
order to mute the UConnectt system: Recognition” button and say 9Transfer Call.9
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button. Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnectt System and Cellular Phone
• Following the beep, say 9Mute.9
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
In order to un-mute the UConnectt system: electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9
with one electronic device at a time.
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
• Following the beep, say 9Mute-off.9
tooth™ connection between a UConnectt paired cellular
phone and the UConnectt system, then follow the in-
struction described in your cellular phone user’s manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
the phone that you wish to select.
• When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
3
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
• The UConnectt system will play the phone names of call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to nectt system will return to using the highest priority
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone present in or near (approximately within 30
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recogni- feet) the vehicle.
tion” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
Delete UConnectt Paired Cellular Phones
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone. • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
Select another Cellular Phone • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
This feature allows you to select and start using another 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
phone paired with the UConnectt system.
• At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
• Press the “Phone” button to begin. prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button • Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say 9Setup,
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose Voice Training9 command.
the phone you wish to delete.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
Things You Should Know About Your UConnectT UConnectt system. For best results, the Voice Training
System session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
UConnectt Tutorial
switched off.
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
“Phone” button and say “UConnectt Tutorial.” This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnectt settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this procedure and follow the prompts.
training mode, follow one of the two procedures:
Voice Recognition (VR)
From outside the UConnectt mode (e.g. from radio
• For best performance, adjust the rear view mirror to
mode)
provide at least 1⁄2 inch (1 cm) gap between the
• Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for 5 overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
seconds until the session begins, or,
• Always wait for the beep before speaking. • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
cents, the system may not always work for some.
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you. • When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9Send.9
3
during a voice recognition period.
• Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in
• Performance is maximized under:
motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
• low-to-medium vehicle speed, names in the UConnectt phone book.
• low road noise, • UConnectt phone book nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
• smooth road surface,
phone book.
• fully closed windows,
• You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
• dry weather condition. spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported. not the UConnectt system.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
compromised with the convertible top down. the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
Bluetooth Communication Link
• low-to-medium blower setting,
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
• low-to-medium vehicle speed, the UConnectt system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
• low road noise,
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
• smooth road surface, in Bluetooth 9on9 mode.
• fully closed windows, and Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
• dry weather condition.
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
• operation from driver seat. wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
3
3
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
zero call
one cancel
two confirmation prompts.
three continue
four delete
five dial
six download
seven edit
eight emergency
nine English
star (*) erase all
plus (+) Espanol
pound (#) Francais
add location help
all home
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
language return to main menu return or main menu
list names select phone select
list phones send 3
mobile set up phone settings or phone
mute set up
mute off towing assistance
new entry transfer call
no UConnectt Tutorial
pager try again
pair a phone voice training
phone pairing pairing work
phonebook phone book yes
previous
record again
redial
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
SEATS
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
Manual Seat Adjustment
Forward & Rearward Adjustment — If Equipped
The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat,
near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in
the position desired. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust 3
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seat, lean forward slightly and lift the lever.
Then lean back to the position desired and release the Seatback Release Lever
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright posi-
tion, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped

WARNING!
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is amount of lumbar support. The control lever is on the
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat inboard side of the seat. Turn the control lever downward
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. of lumbar support.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the This feature allows the front passenger seat to fold flat for
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your extended cargo space. Some fold flat seats also have a
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat hardback surface that you can use as a work surface
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use when the seat is folded flat. Pull up on the lever to fold
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. down the seat back.
forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. For vehicles

equipped with a power passenger seat, use this switch to
move the seat forward and rearward.
Fold Flat Passenger Seat

Power Seat — If Equipped
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
Power Seat Switch
near the floor. For vehicles equipped with a power
driver’s seat, use this switch to move the seat up, down,
Head Restraints
CAUTION!
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
Do not place any article under any seat as it may the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the head
cause damage to the seat controls. restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical.
The head restraints have a locking button that must be
pushed inward to lower the head restraint. However, the
head restraints may be raised without pushing in the
WARNING! button.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
The controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel. After turning on the
ignition, you can choose from High, Low, or Off heat
settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate
the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illumi-
nate for high, one for low, and none for off. 3
Adjustable Head Restraint

Heated Seats — If Equipped
Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The driver and front passenger seats are heated.
Heated Seat Switches
Press the switch once to select high-level heating. Press

WARNING!
the switch a second time to select low-level heating. Press
the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output tion or other physical condition must exercise care
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
high-level heating is selected, the system will automati- at low temperatures, especially if used for long
cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu- periods. Do not place anything on the seat that
ous operation. At that time, the number of indicator insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
lights changes from two to one, indicating the change. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically
after 30 minutes.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt Feature
within two to five minutes. To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary To Lower the Rear Seat
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also,
1. Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
each rear seatback.
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily. 2. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle).
3
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Rear Seat Release Strap
3. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
4. If desired, push down on the seatback to lock it in the Recliner Adjustment

folded position. The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear
To Raise the Rear Seat
seat to recline the seatback.
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
1. If locked in the folded position, pull the release strap
(toward the front of the vehicle).
2. Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED 1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different ences (i.e. seat, side mirror, and radio station presets).
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (1)
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors, and a set of
within 5 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
desired radio station presets.
Center (EVIC), if equipped, will display which memory
3
The memory switch is located on the instrument panel to position is being set.
the left of the steering column. The switch contains an (S)
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
button to activate the memory save function. It also
memory as follows:
contains a rocker switch labeled with the number (1) and
the number (2). The rocker switch allows the driver to 1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles by ences (i.e. seat, side mirror, and radio station presets).
pressing the appropriate side of the switch.
2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
Programming The Memory Feature switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (2)
To create a new memory profile, perform the following: within 5 seconds. The EVIC, if equipped, will display
which memory position is being set.
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
NOTE: Linking & Unlinking the Remote Keyless (RKE)

• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, Transmitter to the Memory Feature
memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in “P” Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
(Park), but the vehicle must be in “P” (Park) to recall a programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profile. memory profiles with a press of the Unlock button on the
RKE Transmitter.
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a To program your transmitters, perform the following:
memory profile.
1. Remove the key from ignition.
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
can be turned on and off through the EVIC, if
equipped. For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Cus- 3. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
tomer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Ve- switch, then press and release the side of the rocker
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. 9Memory Profile Set” (1
manual. or 2) will display in the EVIC, if equipped.
4. Press and release the Lock button on the transmitter
within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your transmitters can be unlinked to the To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
memory setting by pressing the Set (S) button followed memory button number 1 or the Unlock button on the
by the Unlock button on the transmitter in Step 4 above. RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
Memory Position Recall To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
memory button number 2 or the Unlock button on the
NOTE:
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
3
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle must be in “P” (Park) to recall memory A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
not in “P” (Park), a message will display in the EVIC, cancelled, the driver seat and side mirrors will stop
if equipped. moving. A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the Only)
vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
display in the EVIC, if equipped. enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the driver seat position is less than 2.4 inches (60 mm)
key from the ignition switch. forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
or Easy Entry.
the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
equal to 3.5 inches (90 mm) forward of the rear stop. Entry and Easy Exit position.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be turned
you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it
on or off through the programmable features in the EVIC.
out of the LOCK position.
For details, refer to “Automatically Move Seat Back on
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch, Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Program-
the driver seat will move to a position 1.2 inches (30 mable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
is between 2.4 inches and 3.5 inches (60 mm and 90
mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you insert the key into
the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK
position.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Next, locate the safety latch lever between the grille and
Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull hood opening (left of center when facing hood). Push the
the hood release lever located under the left side of the safety latch lever to the right and then raise the hood.
instrument panel.
Underhood Safety Latch

Hood Release
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open To prevent possible damage:
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod is
on the underside of the hood.
fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward
push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that
both latches engage. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when

the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
LIGHTS
Exterior & Interior Lighting Control
The Multi-Function Control Lever on the left side
of the steering column controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, turn signal lights,
instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming,
3
interior lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlights & Parking Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn the end of
the lever to the second detent for headlight operation.
Headlight Switch
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn OFF
This system automatically turns the headlights ON or when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
OFF according to ambient light levels. To turn the system this feature.
ON, turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
the (A) AUTO position (third detent). When the system is
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
ON, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also ON. This
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights
means the headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds
On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
To turn the Automatic System OFF, turn the end of the
formation Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
Multi-Function Control Lever out of the (A) position.
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
This feature is particularly useful when exiting your
lights will turn ON in the Automatic mode.
vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Auto illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the igni-
Headlights Only) tion switch to the LOCK position.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn ON
To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then,
if the Multi-Function Control Lever is placed in the (A)
turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay
interval begins when you turn off the headlights. Only Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
the headlights will illuminate during this time. The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) and operate at DRL (lower) inten-
If you turn the headlights, or parking lights, or ignition
sity, whenever the ignition is on, the engine is running,
switch on again, the system will cancel the delay.
the headlight switch is off, the parking brake is off, the
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn signal is off, and the selector lever is in any position 3
turn off in the normal manner. except “P” (Park).
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center automatically when the turn signal is in operation and
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Delay Turning Headlights turn on again when the turn signal is not operating.
Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Lights-On Reminder
Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
is turned to the LOCK position, a chime will sound to
alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped Turn Signals

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking Move the Multi-Function Lever upward or downward
lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on and the corresponding turn signal indicator on the in-
the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever. strument panel will flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
Front Fog Light Control

NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the Turn Signal Control
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever upward

or downward partially without moving beyond the de-
tent.
If either turn signal indicator has a very fast flash rate,
check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, see your autho-
3
rized dealer for service.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the Multi-Function Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.
Highbeam Functions
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If the Multi-Function Control Lever is held in Cargo Light

the Flash to Pass position for more than 15 seconds, the The cargo light is mounted in the headliner above the
high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds rear cargo area. This light will turn on when you open the
before activating the Flash to Pass function again. liftgate or any door, or if you press the Unlock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or rotate the
Interior Lights
Dimmer Control on the Multi-Function Control Lever
Map/Reading Lights completely upward to the second detent.
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
Battery Saver Feature
overhead console and above the rear doors by the grab
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
handles. Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the light. These
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
because a door is open.
mitter is pressed, or when the Dimmer Control is turned
completely upward to the second detent. Dimmer Control
The Dimmer Control is part of the Multi-Function Con-
trol Lever. It controls the operation of the interior lights
and the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Rotate the Dimmer Control to the first detent to brighten
the odometer and radio display when the parking lights
or headlights are on during daylight conditions.
Interior Light ON
Rotate the Dimmer Control completely upward to the
3
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat OFF
Rotate the Dimmer Control completely downward to the
Dimmer Control (O) OFF position. The interior lights will remain off when
Instrument Panel Dimming the doors are open.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
Dimmer Control upward or downward to change the
brightness of the instrument panel lights.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent past the
The Windshield Wiper / Washer Control Lever is intermittent settings for Low-speed wiper operation, or
located on the right side of the steering column. to the second detent past the intermittent settings for
High-speed wiper operation.
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“Park” position if you turn off the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position
again.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

Intermittent Wiper System

CAUTION!
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the Wind-
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control shield Wiper / Washer Control Lever to the first detent,
is left in any position other than OFF. and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired 3
delay interval. There are five delay settings, which allow
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of two
and allow the wipers to return to the park position cycles every second to a maximum of approximately 36
before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch seconds between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle
is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph (16
vehicle is restarted. km/h).
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
OFF position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the
OFF position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push downward on the Windshield Wiper / Washer
Control Lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the Mist Control
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Auto Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
Headlights Only) This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn ON automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
if the Multi-Function Control Lever (on the left side of the from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
steering column) is placed in the (A) AUTO position. In the end of the Windshield Wiper / Washer Control Lever 3
addition, the headlights will turn OFF when the wipers to one of the five intermittent wiper settings to activate
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Windshield Wiper / Washer Control Lever. Wiper delay
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position
On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer 5 is the most sensitive. Choose position 3 or 4 for normal
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In- rain conditions. Choose position 2 or 1 if you desire less
formation Center” in Section 4 of this manual. wiper sensitivity. Choose position 5 if you desire more
sensitivity. Place the lever in the OFF position when not
using the system.
NOTE: • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing

• The rain-sensing feature will not operate when the feature will not operate when the ignition is first
wiper speed is in the LOW or HIGH position. switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32° F (0° C), unless the
• The rain-sensing feature may not function properly
wiper control is moved, or the vehicle speed becomes
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tempera-
shield.
ture rises above freezing.
• Use of Rain-Xt or products containing wax or silicone
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing feature will
may reduce rain sensor performance.
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the trans-
• The Rain Sense feature can be turned on and off mission selector lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position,
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h),
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to “Personal unless the wiper control is moved or the selector lever
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under is moved out of the “N” (Neutral) position.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
• Remote Start Wipe Inhibit (Vehicles Equipped with
Remote Start System) — The rain-sensing feature will
The rain sensing system has protective features for the not operate when the vehicle is in remote start mode.
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the This feature will return to normal operation once
remote start mode is exited. Refer to “Remote Start Adding Washer Fluid
System” in Section 2 of this manual for information on
NOTE: Refer to the “Engine Compartment” diagram in
remote start operation.
Section 7 for the location of the washer fluid reservoir.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
To use the washer, pull the Windshield Wiper / Washer
Control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid 3
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
washer spray is desired.
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low speed for residual water.
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. WARNING!
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in Commercially available windshield washer solvents
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two wipe are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
cycles and then turn OFF. must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
TILT STEERING COLUMN To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
upward or downward. The tilt control handle is located wheel upward or downward as desired. To lock the
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering steering column in position, pull the control handle
column. upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The

tilt adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjust-
ing the steering wheel while driving or driving
without the tilt adjustment locked could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED To Activate:

When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator Push and release the (“ON/OFF”) button lo-
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). cated on the end of the speed control lever. The
CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will
Electronic Speed Control Operation
illuminate. To turn the system OFF, push and
The speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
release the (“ON/OFF”) button a second time. The 3
CRUISE indicator will turn off. Be sure to turn the system
OFF when not in use.
NOTE:
• The Electronic Speed Control System will automati-
cally turn off when the engine is turned off.
• The Electronic Speed Control System is designed to
shut down if you operate multiple speed control
switch-functions simultaneously (i.e. SET and CAN-
CEL). If this occurs, push and release the (“ON/OFF”)
button to reactivate the system and then reestablish
the desired SET speed.
Speed Control Lever
• The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and

WARNING!
on level ground before pressing the lever (“SET DE-
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on CEL”).
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally To Deactivate:
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. A soft tap on the brake pedal, or pulling the speed control
You could lose control and have an accident. Always lever toward you (“CANCEL”), or normal brake or
leave the system OFF when you are not using it. clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate
the speed control without erasing the set speed from
memory. Pressing the (ON/OFF) button or turning off
To Set At A Desired Speed: the ignition erases the set speed from memory.
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press down
on the lever and release (“SET DECEL”). Release the NOTE: For vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected sion, depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the
speed. speed control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the
speed control disengages is normal.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph (40
km/h) for the speed control to set.
To Resume Speed: To decrease speed while the speed control is set, push
If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the down and hold the lever (“SET DECEL”). Release the
set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new set
20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the previous set speed will be established.
speed. To do so, push the lever up and release (RESUME
Tapping the (“SET DECEL”) button once will result in a
ACCEL), and then remove your foot from the accelerator
1 mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
3
pedal.
tapped, speed decreases.
To Vary The Speed Setting:
To Accelerate For Passing
When the speed control is set, you can increase speed by
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pushing up and holding the lever (“RESUME ACCEL”).
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and
the new set speed will be established. Using Speed Control On Hills
Tapping (“RESUME ACCEL”) once will result in a 1 mph NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped, and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will is normal.
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may need REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without The Rear Park Assist System is a driver aid that senses for
speed loss. obstacles behind the vehicle and provides both visible
and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object.
WARNING!
System Usage Precautions
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system NOTE:
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose to keep the Rear Park Assist System operating prop-
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use erly.
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery. • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the Rear Park Assist System.
• When you turn off the Rear Park Assist System, the
instrument cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DIS-
ABLED.” Furthermore, once you turn off the Rear
Park Assist System, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to “R” (Reverse)

CAUTION!
position and the Rear Park Assist System is turned off,
a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle and • The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid
the instrument cluster will display “PARK ASSIST and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
DISABLED.” cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
• The Rear Park Assist System, when on, will MUTE the temporarily detected or not detected at all. Ob- 3
radio when it is sounding a tone. stacles located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close proximity.
• If a Rear Park Assist System malfunction occurs, a
single chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time
(EVIC) will display “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYS- when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended
TEM” and the LED in the Rear Park Assist switch will that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
illuminate. If this occurs, see your authorized dealer using the Rear Park Assist System.
for service. • Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car
wash soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Enabling & Disabling the System

WARNING!
There are times when you may want to disable the Rear
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when Park Assist System, such as when towing a trailer.
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other Information Center (EVIC)
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off
ing up. You are responsible for safety and must through the EVIC. For details, refer to “Personal Settings
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Fail- (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic
ure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is manual.
strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when Vehicles Equipped with Rear Park Assist Switch
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off by
can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles pressing the Rear Park Assist switch located the lower
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the switch bank below the climate controls.
obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning dis-
play turns the red LEDs ON. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, de-
pending on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
Rear Park Assist Switch Rear Park Assist Indicator

System Operation The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red
The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper LEDs, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of
fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 inches (200 cm) away the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind
from the rear bumper fascia. The warning display located the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the LEDs
above the rear window provides both visible and audible either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the
warnings to indicate the range of the object. display above the rear window.
When the ignition is turned to the ON position, and the The Rear Park Assist System is active when the ignition is
system is enabled, the warning display will turn ON all in the ON position, and the system is enabled, and the
of its LEDs for approximately one second. Then, the driver shifts the transmission into the “R” (Reverse)
system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow position, and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18
LEDs when it is detecting no obstacles. km/h). The following chart shows the warning display
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
1st LED 79 in. (200 cm) Yellow Sounds for 1⁄2 second
2nd LED 51 in. (130 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 45 in. (115 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 31.5 in. (80 cm) 39 in. (100 cm) Yellow None
5th LED 25.5 in. (65 cm) 33.5 in. (85 cm) Yellow None
6th LED 20 in. (50 cm) 28 in. (70 cm) Yellow None
7th LED 16 in. (40 cm) 20 in. (50 cm) Red Intermittent
8th LED 6 in. (15 cm) 12 in. (30 cm) Red Continuous
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train
systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off your vehicle’s the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the
battery. door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage 3
NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
rity Alarm is active. required by federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured after
1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these
safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information
or assistance.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage

WARNING!
when programming.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri- 2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
ous injury or death. away from the HomeLinkt button you wish to program.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (3–8 cm) away
from the HomeLinkt button you wish to program while
Programming HomeLinkT keeping the indicator light in view.
Before You Begin 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons, HomeLinkt button and the hand-held transmitter button
erase all channels before you begin training. until the HomeLinkt indicator changes from a slow to a
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLinkt
seconds until the red indicator flashes. and hand-held transmitter buttons.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the Watch for the HomeLinkt indicator to change flash rates.
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
to HomeLinkt for more efficient training and accurate seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
transmission of the radio-frequency signal. open & close while you train.
NOTE: 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button

• Some gate operators and garage door openers may and observe the indicator light.
require you to replace Step #3 with procedures noted
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” sec-
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
tion.
when the HomeLinkt button is pressed.
• After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the garage
3
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
door does not operate with HomeLinkt and the ga-
then turns to a constant light, continue with program-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
ming for Rolling Code.
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code 5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
System.” At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open & close the door). manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for 2 sec-
onds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for 2 seconds) to complete the training.
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
1 — Garage Door Opener www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig- indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of fully trained.
transmission – which may not be long enough for
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
HomeLinkt to pick up the signal during programming.
at this time.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are 3
designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLinkt.” earlier in this section.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage Using HomeLinkT
door or gate motor. To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
HomeLinkt” Step 3 with the following:
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button used at any time.
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkt
Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkT Button The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when
To re-program a channel that has been previously the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
trained, follow these steps:
Troubleshooting Tips
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here
are some of the most common solutions:
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
release the button.
• Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with PRO- complete the training for Rolling Code.
GRAMMING HOMELINKt Step #2 and follow all re-
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
maining steps.
to plug it back in?
Security
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
in your vehicle.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
General Information POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num- Power Sunroof Switch
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
Opening Sunroof - Express

WARNING!
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat- will open fully and stop automatically. This is called
tended children, can become entrapped by the Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious Closing Sunroof - Express
injury or death. Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
passengers are properly secured too. Pinch Protect Feature
• Do not allow small children to operate the sun- This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
any object to project through the sunroof opening. struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Injury may result.
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- Sunshade Operation

tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
release to Express Close. sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Pinch Protect Override NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing, open.
press the switch forward and hold. This allows the
3
Wind Buffeting
sunroof to move towards the closed position.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
pressed. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Venting Sunroof - Express
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
Press and release the 9V9 button, and the sunroof will
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
stop the sunroof.
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance SKY SLIDERT FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean The Sky Slidert is a full-length, soft-top, power-roof that
the glass panel. opens front to rear or rear to front.
Ignition Off Operation Sky SliderT Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
• The system prohibits Sky Slidert operation when
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
ambient temperature is at –4°F (–20°C) or lower.
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. • The system prohibits Sky Slidert operation at vehicle
speeds of 86 mph (138 km/h) or above.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the • Opening and closing the Sky Slidert consecutively
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening without the engine running may run the battery down.
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• Never attempt to open or close the Sky Slidert when • In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a
it is frozen. Wait until the Sky Slidert is thawed vehicle with the Sky Slidert open. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too.
before operating.
• Before operating the Sky Slider,t make sure that no moving parts
• Opening the Sky Slidert when damp, wet, or dirty of the Sky Slidert can injure a person or animal.
3
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the soft-top • Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near the Sky Slidert
material and the inside of your vehicle. Make sure components or the roof area while operating the Sky Slider.t
the Sky Slidert is dry before opening.
• If potential danger exists while opening or closing the Sky Slidert
• Always close the Sky Slidert when leaving your in Automatic Mode, press and release the switch immediately to
vehicle so as not to leave the interior exposed to interrupt the operation.
potentially damaging outdoor conditions. • If potential danger exists while opening or closing the Sky Slidert
in Operator Mode, release the switch immediately to interrupt the
• Do not leave the Sky Slidert open for several weeks operation.
at a time. Close it occasionally to prevent discolora- • Do not allow small children to operate the Sky Slider.t
tion in the folds of the fabric and to allow the creases
to smooth out. This is especially important if the Sky • Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in the ignition
switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become
Slidert was opened when not completely dry. entrapped by the Sky Slidert while operating the Power Top
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Sky Slider,t vehicle contents, and the vehicle interior. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Power Top Control Opening the Sky SliderT

The Power Top switch is located between the sun visors
Using Automatic Mode
on the overhead console.
Press the switch rearward and release it within 1⁄2 second
and the Sky Slidert will open from the front and move
automatically toward the rear of the vehicle.
Press the switch forward and release it within 1⁄2 second
and the Sky Slidert will open from the rear and move
automatically toward the front of the vehicle.
For either operation, the Sky Slidert will open fully and
stop automatically unless you interrupt the operation by
pressing and releasing the switch again.
NOTE: You can press the switch in either direction to
interrupt the operation.
Power Top Switch
To resume the operation from a partially open position,
NOTE: The Power Top switch will operate when the press and release the switch once again.
ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position, and
when the accessory delay feature is active.
NOTE: The Sky Slidert will not open from the front and NOTE: The Sky Slidert will not open from the front and
the rear at the same time. The Sky Slidert must close fully the rear at the same time. The Sky Slidert must close fully
before opening it from the opposite end. before opening it from the opposite end.
Using Operator Mode Closing the Sky SliderT
Press the switch rearward and hold it and the Sky Slidert
will open from the front and move toward the rear of the
Using Automatic Mode 3
Press and release the button in the center of the switch
vehicle.
and the Sky Slidert will close automatically from any
Press the switch forward and hold it and the Sky Slidert position. The Sky Slidert will close fully and stop auto-
will open from the rear and move toward the front of the matically.
vehicle.
Using Operator Mode
For either operation, the Sky Slidert will open fully and Press the switch rearward and hold it and the Sky Slidert
stop automatically unless you interrupt the operation by will move forward.
releasing the switch.
Press the switch forward and hold it and the Sky Slidert
To resume the operation from a partially open position, will move rearward.
press and hold the switch once again.
For either operation, the Sky Slidert will close fully and
stop automatically unless you interrupt the operation by
releasing the switch.
To resume the operation from a partially closed position, Anti-Pinch Protect Feature
press and hold the switch once again. The Sky Slidert will retract automatically if it detects an
obstruction while closing. If this occurs, remove the
Manually
obstruction and use the switch again to close the Sky
The Sky Slidert drive motors are mounted to the roof
Slider.t
above the cargo lamp. In the event that your vehicle
losses battery power, you can close the Sky Slidert by
WARNING!
turning the drive gears in the appropriate motor with a 6
mm Allen wrench. To do so, you must first remove the There is no anti-pinch protection when the Sky
cargo lamp from the headliner. Then, insert the wrench Slidert is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects
into the “Allen” shaped hole in the appropriate motor from the Sky Slidert before closing.
and turn the wrench clockwise until the top closes
completely. The left motor facing forward will close the
top when it is open from the rear of the vehicle. The right Wind Buffeting
motor will close the top when it is open from the front of Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
the vehicle. pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the Sky Slidert in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the Sky Slidert open, adjust the Sky Slidert opening
to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sky SliderT Maintenance
Refer to “Sky Slidert Top Care” under “Maintaining Your
3
Vehicle” in Section 7 of this manual.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET

Your vehicle is equipped with a fused 12-volt power
outlet. This outlet is located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls. It has power available when
Front Power Outlet
the ignition switch is in the ON position. It can operate a
conventional cigar lighter unit or power accessories NOTE: If desired, the instrument panel power outlet
designed for use with a standard power outlet adapter. can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide
power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off POWER INVERTER — If EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC (150
CAUTION! Watt maximum) power outlet located on the back of the
center console. This outlet can power small appliances
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power and electronic devices.
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories
still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from 115VAC (150W) Power Outlet
the plug.
A control switch for the outlet is located in the lower available at the outlet. Press and release the switch again
switch bank below the climate controls. to turn off the power outlet. The status indicator will also
turn off.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power rating is exceeded.
3
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:

• Do not use a 3-Prong Adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
115VAC (150W) Power Outlet Control Switch
Press and release the switch once to turn on the power • Close the lid when not in use.
outlet. A status indicator in the switch will illuminate in • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
approximately one second to indicate that power is electric shock and failure.
CUP HOLDERS
Front and rear cup holders are located in the center
console.
Rear Cup Holders
Front Cup Holders

STORAGE Console Storage Compartment

To open, press the latch and lift the cover.
Front Storage Compartment
The front storage compartment (located on the left side of
the instrument panel) can hold cell phones, PDA’s, and
other small items.
3
Center Console
Front Storage Compartment

The center console has a removable storage tray, which CARGO AREA FEATURES
can hold cell phones, PDA’s, and other small items.
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg). The load floor has a built-in storage bin that can
hold a variety of items. The underside of the storage bin
cover also contains a plastic lined tray. The cover can be
installed with either side facing up for added utility.
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
Section for additional information on the 60/40 Split
Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat feature.
Accessing the Storage Bin
Removable Storage Tray
NOTE: The spring-loaded latches that retain the
storage bin cover to the cargo load floor should not be
used as cargo tie-downs.
1. Flip the spring-loaded latch pull-loops up.
NOTE: You can install the cover with either side facing
upward.
5. With the cover seated in the floor, pull upward on
loops and twist them 1⁄4 turn so that they are no longer
parallel to the slots in the cover.
3
6. Flip the loops down.
WARNING!
A loose storage bin cover thrown forward in a colli-

sion or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
2. Pull the loops upward and twist them 1⁄4 turn so that vehicle. Always latch the storage bin cover to the
they are parallel to the slots in the storage bin cover. cargo load floor with the spring-loaded latches when
not accessing the storage bin.
3. Lift the cover upward over the loops.
4. When done, reinstall the cover with the handle recess
facing toward you.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks & Loops NOTE: The spring-loaded latches that retain the
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor should be used storage bin cover to the cargo load floor should not be
to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving. used as cargo tie-downs.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
Cargo Tie-Down Loops

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

WARNING!
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use sway.
3
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve- dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for WARNING!
loading your vehicle:
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de- cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
scribed on the label attached to the left door or left only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
door center pillar. use seat belts.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped

NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to Then, insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end
make more room in the cargo area. of the cover housing into the attachment point on the
opposite side of the vehicle.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into either of the left or the
right attachment points shown.
Next, grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward
WARNING!
you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the
rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the In an accident, a cargo cover loose in the vehicle
notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the cover to could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
position the posts into the bottom of the notches and stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
release the handle. the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger 3
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES The rotary ring switch on the lever controls rear wiper
and washer operation. Rotate the switch upward to the
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
first detent to activate the rear wiper. Rotate the switch
The Rear Window Wiper / Washer Control is
upward to the second detent to activate the rear washer.
located on the right side of the steering column.
The washer will continue to operate until you release the
switch. Once released, the wiper will cycle three times,
return to the park position, and then resume normal
operation.
NOTE: The rear wiper will automatically return to the
“Park” position if you turn off the ignition switch while
it is operating. The rear wiper will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position
again.
Rear Window Wiper / Washer Control

Adding Washer Fluid

CAUTION!
The windshield washer and rear window washer share
• Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an the same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is located in the
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
result if the rear wiper control is left in the ON fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
position. windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and 3
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper residual water.
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper located on the climate control. Press this button to
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side
mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the button will illumi-
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
nate when the rear window defroster is ON. The de-
the rear wiper blade from returning to the PARK
froster turns off automatically after approximately 10
position. If the rear wiper control is turned OFF
minutes of operation for the first push of the button, and
and the blade cannot return to the PARK position,
will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second
damage to the rear wiper motor may occur.
push of the button.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth The tie loops provided in the side rails can be used to
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to help tie down cargo; however, crossbars should always
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Tie
after soaking with warm water. loops should not be used on their own to attach luggage
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra- to the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the that the load remains securely attached.
window. NOTE: Crossbars are offered by Mopart accessories.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
the heating elements. and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
CAUTION! WARNING!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
secure the load appropriately. sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack 3
Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CONTENTS
m Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ▫ Telephone (UConnect™) — If Equipped . . . . . 214
4
m Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
m Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
m Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
m Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 ▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
186 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
m Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped) . . 239
Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 223
m Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . . 231
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 242
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 252
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 252
m Sales Code RER — Multimedia System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 m Satellite Radio (RSC) — If Equipped
(RER/REQ/REN Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio . . . . . 239
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 187
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification ▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio

Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 ▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media
(i.e. CD) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
m CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 4
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . . . . . . 255
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
▫ Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
System (VES™) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
m Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 258
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 5 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank

2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Glove Box 10 — Storage Bin*
3 — Storage Tray 7 — Climate Control * If Equipped
4 — Center Air Outlet 8 — Power Outlet
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 4. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If

Equipped
1. Fuel Gauge
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when
should be checked monthly when cold and
ignition switch is in the ON position. (See page 359
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
for more information.)
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
2. Fuel Cap Indicator placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
where the fuel cap is located. vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
3. Low Fuel Warning Light
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
approximately 1/8 tank. (See page 359 for more
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
information.)
more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Ac-
cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has 4
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
low tire pressure telltale.
continue to function properly. (See page 346 for more
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS information.)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
5. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light —

CAUTION!
If Equipped
The TPMS has been optimized for the original This light informs you of a problem with the
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem
warning have been established for the tire size is detected, the light will turn on while the
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- engine is running. If the light remains lit with
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable
placement equipment that is not of the same size, and not need towing, however see your authorized
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause dealer for service as soon as possible.
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants If the light is flashing when the engine is running, you
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. (Refer to increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
“Tire Inflation Pressures” under “Tires — General require towing. Immediate service is required.
Information” and to “Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS)” in Section 5 of this manual for more The light will turn on when the ignition switch is first
information). turned ON, and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is
normal. If the light does not turn on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
6. Malfunction Indicator Light converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as

This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system soon as possible if this occurs. (See page 399 for more
called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and information.)
automatic transmission control systems. The light
will turn on when the key is in the ON position before CAUTION!
engine start. If the light does not turn on when turning
the key from LOCK or ACC to ON, have the condition Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
checked promptly. damage to the engine control system. It also could 4
affect fuel economy and driveability.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may turn on the light after engine If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
through several of your typical driving cycles. In most service is required.
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and it will not
require towing.
7. High Beam Indicator Light
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the This light shows that the headlights are on high
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that beam. Pull the Multi-Function Control Lever on
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic the left side of the steering column toward you to switch
to Low beam. (See page 133 for more information.)
8. Front Fog Light Indicator Light — If Equipped 11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Traction
This light shows when the fog lights are ON. (See Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
page 133 for more information.) If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
9. Speedometer
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Be sure to
Shows the vehicle speed.
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
10. Turn Signal Indicator Light road conditions. (See page 314 for more infor-
The left or right arrow will flash in unison with the mation.)
corresponding front and rear turn signal lights when
12. Charging System Warning Light
the turn signal switch is operated. (See page 133 for more
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
information.)
ing system. The light should turn on when the
NOTE: A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices,
NOTE: Check for a defective outside light bulb if either
such as the Fog Lights or Rear Defroster. If the light
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
remains on, it means that the charging system is experi-
encing a problem. See your local authorized dealer to
obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY.
13. Oil Pressure Warning Light If the light remains on or turns on during driving, it
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
will turn on and remain on when the ignition is not functioning and that service is required. However,
switch is turned from the LOCK or ACC position to the the conventional brake system will continue to operate
ON position. The light will turn off after the engine is normally, provided the BRAKE warning light is not on.
started. If the light does not turn on during starting, have
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock Brakes. 4
If the light turns on and remains on while driving, safely
bring the vehicle to a stop and shut off the engine. DO The ABS Warning light should be checked frequently to
NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition
CORRECTED. switch to the ON position, but do not start the vehicle.
The light should turn on. If the light does not turn on,
This light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. have the system checked by an authorized dealer. (See
The engine oil level must be checked using the proper
page 310 for more information.)
procedure. (See page 403 for more information.)
14. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light 15. Tachometer
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys- This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
tem. This light will turn on when the ignition (rpm x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area, ease
switch is turned to the ON position and it may up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
stay on for approximately 3 seconds.
16. 4 LOW Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped 18. TOW / HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in This light will illuminate when selecting
the 4WD LOW mode. In this mode, the front TOW/HAUL. The TOW/HAUL button is lo-
driveshaft and rear driveshaft are mechanically cated on the gearshift bezel. (See page 281 for
locked together forcing the front and rear more information.)
wheels to rotate at the same speed. (See page 292 for
19. 4WD Indicator Light — Vehicles Equipped with
more information.)
Command-Tract
17. Hill Descent Control Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill the four-wheel drive mode. In this mode, the
Decent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are me-
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only chanically locked together forcing the front and
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. (See page 292 for
Low” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph. more information.)
If these conditions are not met while attempting to use
20. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator lamp will flash
System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light – If Equipped
on/off.(See page 314 for more information.)
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow
“ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” in the instrument
cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the sound will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following
“ON” position. It should go out with the engine running. a maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously
21. SERV (Service) 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected
The “SERV 4WD Indicator Light” will turn on
in either the ESP or the BAS system, or both. If this light
when the ignition key is turned to the ON
remains on after the several ignition cycles, and the
position and it will stay on for 2 seconds. If the
vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater
light stays on or turns on during driving, it 4
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as
means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
and that service is required.
corrected.(See page 314 for more information.)
22. Coolant Temperature Warning Light
NOTE: The “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on mo-
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
tion. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
NOTE: Each time the ignition switch is turned ON, the over and stop the vehicle. If the air conditioner is
ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previ- on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into “N”
ously. (Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immedi-
NOTE: The ESP Control System will make buzzing or
ately and call for service. (See page 384 for more infor-
clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
mation.)
NOTE: As the coolant temperature gauge approaches

WARNING!
9H,9 this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
gauge to pass 9H.9 In this case, the indicator will flash others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
continuously and a continuous chime will sound, until coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
the engine is allowed to cool. vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
CAUTION! the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with 23. Coolant Temperature Gauge
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates
the “H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The
engine off immediately, and call for service. gauge pointer will likely indicate a high temperature
when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
heavy traffic, or when towing a trailer. If the pointer rises
to the “H” mark, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If
the air conditioner is on, turn it off. Also, shift the 24. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
transmission into “N” (Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If Equipped
the needle remains on the “H” mark, turn the engine off This light indicates that the transmission fluid
immediately and call for service. (See page 384 for more temperature is running hot. This may occur
information.) with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
NOTE: The gauge pointer will remain near its last
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into “N” (Neutral)
reading when the engine is turned off. It will return to a 4
and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns
true reading when the engine is restarted.
off.
CAUTION! 25. Trip Odometer Button
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en- Changing the Display
gine running, as you would not be able to react to the Press and release this button once to change the display
temperature indicator if the engine overheats. from odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it again to
change the display from “Trip A” to “Trip B.” On vehicles
equipped with a Base Cluster, press and release it once
again to display the outside temperature. On vehicles
equipped with a Mid Line Cluster, press and release it
once again to display the outside temperature and com- 27. Odometer/Trip Odometer
pass heading in the screen below the speedometer. Refer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
to “Vacuum Fluorescent Display” for details been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional
Resetting the Trip Odometer
information.
Display the trip mileage that you want to reset, “Trip A”
NOTE: U.S. federal regulations require upon transfer of
or “Trip B.” Then push and hold the button (approxi-
vehicle ownership, the seller certify the mileage the
mately 2 seconds) until the display resets to 0. The
vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer
odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom-
reading is changed because of repair or replacement, be
eter.
sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the
26. 4WD Indicator Light — Vehicles Equipped with service so that the correct mileage can be determined.
Selec-Tract II
Vehicle Warning Messages
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the full-time four-wheel drive auto mode. In When the appropriate conditions exist, messages such as
this mode, the system operates with a normal “door” (for door ajar), “gATE” (for liftgate ajar), “gLASS”
torque split of 42% front axle and 58% rear axle. (for flip-up glass ajar), “gASCAP” (for fuel cap fault), or
It can redirect up to 100% of torque to the front or rear “CHANgE OIL” will display in the odometer.
axle, if necessary.(See page 292 for more information.)
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the Change Oil Message (Base & Mid Line Clusters Only)
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
then most warnings will display in the EVIC. (See page
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
206 for more information.)
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
Fuel Cap Fault Message seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the 4
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
words “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
your personal driving style.
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
problem continues, the message will appear the next time time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
the vehicle is started. turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
scheduled maintenance) perform the following proce-
(See page 399 for more information.)
dure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat belt
times within 10 seconds. remains unbuckled. (See page 48 for more information.)
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 31. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
including brake fluid level and parking brake
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
application. If the light turns on, it may indi-
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
cate that the parking brake is applied, that the
28. Cruise Indicator Light — If Equipped brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
This indicator lights when the electronic speed anti-lock brake system (if equipped).
control system is turned on. (See page 147 for
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
more information.)
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
29. Transmission Range Indicator system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
This display indicator shows automatic transmission indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
gear selection. (See page 281 for more information.) when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
30. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for several seconds after the The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
cornering maneuvers, which can change fluid level con- will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
ditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and to the ABS system is required.
the brake fluid level checked.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- by turning the ignition switch from the LOCK or ACC
sary. position to the ON position. The light should turn on for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn 4
WARNING! off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not turn on, have the light
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger- inspected by an authorized dealer. (See page 310 for more
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will information.)
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
32. Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light — If 34. Vacuum Fluorescent Display (Mid Line & Premium
Equipped Clusters Only)
This light will flash rapidly for approximately On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster, this
16 seconds when the vehicle security system is display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
arming and then flash slowly when the system (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions exist.
is armed. The light will also turn on for about (See page 206 for more information.)
three seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. (See
On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster, this
page 18 for more information.)
display shows the compass heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW,
33. Airbag Warning Light SE, and SW) and the outside temperature.
This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8
Setting Compass Variance (Mid Line Cluster Only)
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
turn on during starting, stays on, or turns on North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
while driving, have the system checked by an authorized country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
dealer. (See page 57 for more information.) North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from

the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
NOTE: The vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h)
(manual transmission) or the gear selector lever in “P”
(Park) (auto transmission) to enter the variance setting
mode. 4
To set the variance, first, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position. Next, press and hold the trip odometer
button until the current variance zone number displays
(approximately ten seconds). Then, press and release the
button to increment the variance value by one, until the
proper variance zone is selected according to the map.
Finally, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position to
exit this mode.
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During program- vehicle in one or more complete circles, at speeds under
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from power lines and
zone 1. large metallic objects, until the “CAL” indicator turns off.
The compass will now function normally.
Calibrating the Compass (Mid Line Cluster Only)
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate, or abnormal, ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
you may wish to calibrate it. However, prior to calibrat- (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
ing the compass, make sure the proper Compass Variance The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
value is selected. tures a driver-interactive display. It is located at the
bottom of the speedometer in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: The vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons
(manual transmission) or the gear selector lever in “P” (described in this section) are also equipped with the
(Park) (auto transmission) to enter the calibration mode. EVIC. The EVIC consists of the following:
To calibrate the compass, first, start the engine. Next, • System Status
press and hold the trip odometer button until the current
variance zone number displays (approximately ten sec- • Vehicle information warning message displays
onds). Then, press and hold the button again until the • Tire Pressure Monitor System (If Equipped)
direction displays with the “CAL” indicator on continu-
ously (approximately ten seconds). Finally, drive the • Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
• Compass display Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip

Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
• Outside temperature display
Status Messages, and Personal Settings (Cus-
• Trip computer functions SCROLL tomer Programmable Features).
Button
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays (If Equipped) Press and release the COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight
• Navigation system screens (If Equipped) compass readings and the outside temperature. 4
• Audio mode display Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
The system allows the driver to select information by a selection.
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel: FUNC-
Press and release the MENU button and the TION
mode displayed will change between Trip SELECT
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System Button
MENU Status, Personal Settings, and Telephone (if
Button equipped).
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not in Park (with
Displays a single chime) — automatic transmission
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
• Memory System Disabled – Vehicle in Motion (with a
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
single chime) — manual transmission
messages:
• Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
single chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) — automatic transmission
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in Motion —
chime) manual transmission
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in • Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
motion) “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of this
manual.
• Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5 of
• Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
this manual for more details)
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of this
manual. • Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
4
• Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to • Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of this
Oil Change Required
manual.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
• Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
this manual. seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
this manual.
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each Trip Functions
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To Press and release the MENU button until one of the
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator system
• Average Fuel Economy
(after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform
the following procedure: • Distance To Empty
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not • Elapsed Time
start the engine).
• Display Units of Measure in
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
within 10 seconds.
Computer functions.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you tion:
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
• Average Fuel Economy
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
continue from the last fuel average reading before the the 9LOW FUEL9 text and a new DTE value will
reset. display.
• Distance To Empty (DTE) • Elapsed Time
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON 4
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel or START position.
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
• Display Units of Measure in:
SELECT button.
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle TION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
To Reset The Display
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
• When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
change to a text display of 9LOW FUEL.9 This display played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3
seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Manual Compass Calibration

(>Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window). If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
Compass Display
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the 1. Turn on the ignition switch.
compass button to display one of eight com-
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings
pass readings and the outside temperature.
(Customer Programmable Features) menu displays in the
Automatic Compass Calibration EVIC.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
displays in the EVIC.
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may 4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in
360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic the EVIC.
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
5. Complete one or more 360° turns (in an area free from
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
4
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. • Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery
strength, and signal strength in increments of 20
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
percent.
2 seconds.
• Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air-
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed,
message and the last variance zone number displays in
roaming, and no phone connection.
the EVIC.
• UConnect Active.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the • Caller ID phone number display.
map.
When the appropriate conditions exist, and if supported
5. Press and release the compass button to exit. by the cell phone, the EVIC will display the following
telephone symbols:
Telephone (UConnect™) — If Equipped
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
Press and release the MENU button until “Telephone”
signal strength of the UConnect™ phone. The
displays in the EVIC.
number of horizontal bars increases as the
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC pro- Signal strength of the UConnect™ phone signal in-
vides the following telephone information: Strength creases.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
incoming call. you have voice mail.
Incom- Voice
ing Call Mail
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a
the UConnect™ phone is currently in analog text message.
mode. 4
Analog Text
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that Message
the UConnect™ phone is currently roaming. The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
battery strength of the UConnect™ phone.
Roam-
ing Battery
Strength
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
a phone connection has been made. tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
Call in choices:
Progress
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that Language
the Connect™ phone is currently not available. When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
Phone
Not the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
Avail- select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
able Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect™
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall language selection. For vehicles equipped with sales code
features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h) REQ or RES radio, refer to “Language Selection” under
(manual transmission) or when the gear selector lever is “HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™)” for
in “P” (Park) (auto transmission).
details. For vehicles equipped with sales code RER radio, entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for UCon- selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
nect™ system operating instructions. unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC- 4
Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock — If
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
Equipped
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
When ON is selected, you can use your Remote Keyless
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the “P”
Entry Transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed
(Park) or “N” (Neutral) position and the driver’s door is
memory profiles. Each memory profile contains desired
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
position settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjust-
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
able pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic
pears.
steering column (if equipped), and a set of desired radio
Remote Key Unlock station presets. When OFF is selected, only the memory
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s switch on the driver’s door panel will recall memory
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless profiles. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap- Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit — If
pears. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this Equipped
manual for more information. This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
pears.
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
or “OFF” appears. to ON) when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used
to unlock the door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under
Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers — If Equipped
“Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
more information.
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
standard intermittent wiper operation. remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press and release the when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap- and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
pears. “30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
Headlights Only) When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To 4
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your sec.” appears.
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
When this feature is selected, the power window
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual. and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE- Park Assist System — If Equipped
LECT button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects
appears. behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the “R”
(Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18
Illumination Approach
km/h). Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in Section 3 of
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
this manual for system function and operating informa-
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press and hold the RESET button
pears.
until “OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
“HSA (Hill Start Assist)” under “Electronic Brake Control
UConnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selec-
System” in Section 5 of this manual for system function
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
and operating information. To make your selection, press
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Electrical Disturbances

Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
Radio Broadcast Signals
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
carry the FM signal.
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help AM Reception 4
you understand and save you concern about these “ap- AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig- and neon signs.
nals.
FM Reception
Two Types of Signals Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM (Ampli- tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
tude Modulation), in which the transmitted sound causes can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to vary... and which is the major feature of FM radio.
FM (Frequency Modulation), in which the frequency of
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic
the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the radio and steering
wheel radio controls (if equipped) will remain active for
45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
feature. JACK)
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the radio NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
and steering wheel radio controls (if equipped) will side of your radio faceplate.
remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time is program-
mable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accesso-
ries Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
REQ Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
stations without stopping until you release it.
position to operate the radio.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each 4
Electronic Volume Control listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect™ Hands Free
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
Phone) — If Equipped
the left decreases it.
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UCon-
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be nect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Com-
set at the same volume level as last played. munication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more informa-
tion.
SEEK Buttons (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch available on your vehicle, a “UConnect™ System Not
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio Available” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) — 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE
If Equipped control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UCon- blink.
nect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Com-
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control
munication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more informa-
knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change.
tion.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “UConnect™ System Not The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
Available” message will display on the radio screen. and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at step
TIME Button
2.
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch INFO Button (Radio Mode)
between the time and frequency displays. Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
Clock Setting Procedure
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
control knob.
RW/FF (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and
Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
TUNE Control (Radio Mode) the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or left side speakers. 4
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will left or right to adjust the sound level between the front
display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to and rear speakers.
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and tone, balance, and fade.
MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
MUSIC TYPE Button (Radio Mode)
right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or turning
the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the
program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do 16 Digit-Character

not currently broadcast Music Type information. Program Type
Display
Toggle the Music Type button to select the following Nostalgia Nostalga
format types: Oldies Oldies
16 Digit-Character Personality Persnlty
Program Type
Display Public Public
No program type or un- Rhythm and Blues R&B
None
defined Religious Music Rel Musc
Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Talk Rel Talk
Classical Classicl Rock Rock
Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft
College College Soft Rock Soft Rck
Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Foreign Language Language Sports Sports
Information Inform Talk Talk
Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40
News News Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon • DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
station with the same selected Music Type name. The highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
Music Type function only operates when in the FM up and down the menu (If Equipped).
mode. • DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
pushing the SELECT button (If Equipped).
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be 4
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
SETUP Button will display the following:
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
• Subtitle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch
the following items:
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
NOTE: Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the available on the disc (If Equipped).
entries. Push the Audio/Select button to select an entry
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will
and make changes.
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (If Equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change • Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button will
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (If allow user to set the clock. Turn the TUNE control
Equipped). knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
TUNE control knob again to save changes.
entries varies depending upon the disc.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing
user to scroll through the following items, and set
a DVD.
defaults according to customer preference.
• VES Power - Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF (If
Menu Language — If Equipped
Equipped).
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
• VES Lock - Locks out rear VES remote controls (If
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
Equipped).
language supported by disc). If customer wishes to select
• VES CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change mode of a language not listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9
either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones, by pressing Enter the 4-digit country code using the TUNE control
the Audio/Select button (If Equipped). knob to scroll up and down to select the # and then push
to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped Audio DRC — If Equipped

Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum
audio language (effective only if language supported by audio dynamic range - The default is set to 9High,9 and
disc). If customer wishes to select a language not listed, under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher
then scroll down and select 9other.9 Enter the country than if the setting is 9Normal.9
code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
to select the # and then push to select. 4
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default
AutoPlay — If Equipped
subtitle language (effective only if language supported
by disc). If customer wishes to select a language not When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted, it
listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9 Enter the will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play
country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
and down to select the # and then push to select. auto play the main title. In such cases, use the menu
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between
subtitle OFF or ON.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before You may add a second station to each push-button by
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
customer-preferred settings. both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
AM and FM Buttons (Radio Mode)
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
SET Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the twice.
Push-Button Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
button number will display.
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
and press and release that button. If a button is not commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
DISC Button
into push-button memory.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) position to operate the radio.
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
geographic region. These region codes must match in
Press the LOAD button and the push-button with the
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays 4
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
9INSERT DISC,9 insert the CD into the player.
of the player a maximum of 5 times.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
CAUTION! is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate CAUTION!
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the • This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
components. CD player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s) SCAN Button (CD MODE)

Press the eject button and the push-button with Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD CD currently playing.
was loaded and the disc will unload and move
TIME Button (CD MODE)
to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc is being
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
will be ejected from the radio.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD,
MP3/MWA modes.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files • Maximum number of directory levels: 8

The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
• Maximum number of files: 255
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the • Maximum number of folders: 100
following restrictions.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Supported Media (Disc Types)
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the 4
3-character extension)
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3. • Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
When reading discs recorded using formats other than CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read WMA files). Discs created with an option such as 9keep
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- disc open after writing9 are most likely multisession
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
If a disc contains multi formats, such as CD audio and MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-
mp3/wma tracks, the radio will only play the mp3/wma Bit rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
tracks on that disc. 320, 256, 224, 192,
MPEG-1 Audio
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats 48, 44.1, 32 160, 128, 112, 96, 80,
Layer 3
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA 64, 56, 48
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files MPEG-2 Audio 160, 128, 144, 112,
24, 22.05, 16
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play- Layer 3 96, 80, 64, 56, 48
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file. WMA Specifi- Sampling Fre-
Bit Rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
48, 64, 96, 128, 160,
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling WMA 44.1 and 48
192 VBR
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates. supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files. pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
affected by the following: 4
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
to load than non-multisession discs
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
increase with more files and folders
time9 priority mode.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
and radio will display song titles for each file.
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
return to 9elapsed time9 display. No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which No function.
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
for 5 seconds.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
No function.
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone Macrovision

(UConnect™) (If Equipped) This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
Section 3 of this manual. tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only
Equipped)
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section. 4
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
DTS
System (VESt) (If Equipped)
9DTS9 and 9DTS 2.09 are trademarks of Digital Theater
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Systems, Inc.
Guide.”
Dolby SALES CODE RER — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. EQUIPPED
9Dolby9 and the double-D symbol are trademarks of NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
Dolby Laboratories. of the unit’s faceplate.
The RER multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius
Satellite Radio player, Navigation system, CD/DVD
player, USB port, 20 gigabyte Hard Drive (HDD), and the music and photos from CDs or through the USB port.
UConnectt hands-free Bluetooth cellular system. While the Gracenote database finds the artist, track, and
title for the music.
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnectt,
the unit will respond with a “Feature Not Available” An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
message when selecting controls related to this feature. portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
A 6.5-inch touch screen allows easy menu selection, while
(VES), separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than
to the car speakers while different audio tracks play
1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertainment, and
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
hands-free mobile phone use.
rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
The satellite navigation capability combines a Global- rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and front
Positioning System-based navigation system with an seat passenger listen to the radio.
integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identifica-
Other special features include direct tune, music type
tion, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
selections, Traffic Messaging (optional), easy store pre-
variety of destinations and routes.
sets, parental lockout for VES (if equipped), backup
A shared Hard Drive (HDD) for the navigation system, camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup
the database, and other radio features allows uploads of
camera, and on some models a dual display screen Changing the Time Zone
operation. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
1. Turn on the system.
detailed operating instructions.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
“Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen,
operating instructions.
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free 4
3. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the
Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped)
top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
the words “User Clock” are displayed. The GPS time
operating instructions.
setting menu will appear on the screen.
Clock Setting Procedure
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
the screen.
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys- 5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
and daylight savings information is set. want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
Changing Daylight Savings Time 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen,
current setting: proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
1. Turn on the system. 3. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top
of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the
words “GPS Time” are displayed. The user clock time
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
played to change the current setting.
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
Setting the User Clock ward is displayed.
If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
performing the following:
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
1. Turn on the system. screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
the word “Save” is displayed. WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
Show Time if Radio is Off NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
When selected, this feature will display the time of day side of your radio faceplate.
on the touch screen when the system is turned off.
Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the system. 4
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
RES Radio (Non-Satellite Model Shown - With Satellite

Similar)
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Press the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies,
time to turn off the radio.
pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before
Electronic Volume Control continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 SCAN button a second time.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect™ Hands Free
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Phone) — If Equipped
volume and to the left decreases it.
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UCon-
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be nect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Com-
set at the same volume level as last played. munication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more informa-
tion.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not Clock Setting Procedure
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With UCon-
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
nect” message will display on the radio screen.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
Phone Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) —
control knob.
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UCon- 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE
nect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Com- control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to 4
munication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more informa- blink.
tion.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With UCon-
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
nect” message will display on the radio screen.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
TIME Button
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
SETUP button, use the TUNE control to select SET
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
between the time and frequency displays.
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
press the SETUP button and then follow the above Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will
procedure, starting at Step 2. display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
RW/FF Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
AM or FM frequencies.
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
TUNE Control the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or left side speakers.
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and 16 Digit-Character
FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the Program Type
Display
left or right to adjust the sound level between the front No program type or un-
and rear speakers. None
defined
Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting Adult Hits Adlt Hit
tone, balance, and fade. Classical Classicl
MUSIC TYPE Button Classic Rock Cls Rock 4
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type College College
mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or Country Country
turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will Foreign Language Language
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio Information Inform
stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa- Jazz Jazz
tion. News News
Toggle the Music Type button to select the following Nostalgia Nostalga
format types: Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
16 Digit-Character station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Program Type Music Type function only operates when in the FM
Display
Rhythm and Blues R&B mode.
Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Religious Talk Rel Talk (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
Soft Soft SETUP Button
Soft Rock Soft Rck Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B the following items:
Sports Sports • Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
Talk Talk user to set the clock. Turn the TUNE control knob to
Top 40 Top 40 adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE
Weather Weather control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE
control knob again to save changes.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a station that you wish to button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
commit to push-button memory {12 AM and 12 FM
and press and release that button. If a button is not
stations}.
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored DISC Button 4
into push-button memory. Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display MP3 Audio Play
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be stored into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by NOTE: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs
pressing the push-button twice. (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
pact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)

CAUTION!
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into • This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than CD player mechanism.
an inch, a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected
before a new disc can be loaded. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
a second CD if one is already loaded.
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
track 1. can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within TIME Button
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press this button to change the display from a large CD
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
the current CD track/title.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will 4
SEEK Button
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
works in a similar manner.
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of AM or FM Button
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD,
RND Button (Random Play Button)
MP3 modes.
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
SCAN Button Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
CD currently playing. change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran- files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
domly selected track. mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When • Maximum number of folders (The radio display of file
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
tions. of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) display.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than • Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read 3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
3-character extension) use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-
Bit Rate (kbps)
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). cation quency (kHz)
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after MPEG-1 Audio
320, 256, 224, 192,
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of 48, 44.1, 32 160, 128, 112, 96, 80,
Layer 3
64, 56, 48, 40, 32 4
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times. 160, 128, 144, 112,
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40,
Supported MP3 File Formats Layer 3
32, 24, 16, 8
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
supported by the radios.
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
Playback of MP3 Files LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
time to start playing the MP3 files. pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
by the following:
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
to load than non-multisession discs
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
increase with more files and folders
time9 priority mode.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
and radio will display song titles for each file.
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
return to 9elapsed time9 display. Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for 5 seconds (when ignition is
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
off).
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s (UConnect™) (If Equipped)
audio system to amplify the source and play through the Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in 4
vehicle speakers. Section 3 of this manual.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
iary device if the AUX jack is connected. Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX System (VESt) (If Equipped)
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Guide.”
SATELLITE RADIO (RSC) — IF EQUIPPED further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-
(RER/REQ/REN RADIOS ONLY) 7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast- Please have the following information available when
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to calling:
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
Number (ESN/SID).
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
System Activation Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you Number (ENS/SID)
may begin listening immediately to the one year of The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory- ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm steps:
subscription information, including the set up of your
ESN/SID Access
on-line listening account at no additional charge. For
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY
position and the radio ON, press the SETUP button and
scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID Reception Quality
number will display. The Sirius ID number display will Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
time out in 2 minutes. Press any button on the radio to following reasons:
exit this screen.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
Selecting Satellite Mode structure or under a physical obstacle.
Press the SAT button until 9SAT9 appears in the display. A
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio 4
form of short audio mutes.
mode.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
Satellite Antenna
cause intermittent reception.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped). cause signal blockage.
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not position to operate the radio.
place items directly on or above the antenna.
SEEK Buttons 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next the time (press and hold again to return to normal
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek display).
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
RW/FF
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
without stopping until you release it.
direction of the arrows.
SCAN Button
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
the next channel, pausing for 8 seconds before continuing
counter-clockwise to decrease the channel.
to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a
second time. MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or
Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist, Song
turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
Title, and Composer (if available) information. Also,
allow the program format type to be selected.
pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next and press and release that button. If a button is not
channel with the same selected Music Type name. selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the channel will continue to play but will not be stored
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
into push-button memory.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. You may add a second channel to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press 4
SETUP Button
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
following items:
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the SELECT button push-button memory. The channels stored in SET 2
to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscrip- twice.
tion.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory button number will display.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
commit to push-button memory {12 Satellite stations}.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If

Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES™) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES™)
Guide.”
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
Remote Sound Controls
surface of the steering wheel. The left- and right-hand
controls are rocker-type switches with a push-button in Right-Hand Switch Functions
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering • Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
wheel to access the switches.
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc).
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation • Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
and so forth.
station up from the current setting.
• Press the button located in the center of the switch to
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
listenable station down from the current setting.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the 4
the next preset that you have programmed.
following precautions:
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Media (i.e. CD)
Operation 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track. 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the 3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one disc; avoid scratching the disc.
second after the current track begins to play. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of

outer rotary dials and inner push buttons.
Blower Control NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems

Use this control to regulate the lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
amount of air forced through the ven- denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-
tilation system in any mode. The tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
blower speed increases as you move from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
the control to the right from the “O” Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
(Off) position. There are four blower condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
speeds. 4
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Temperature Control Use this control to choose from several
Use this control to regulate the tem- patterns of air distribution. You can
perature of the air inside the passenger select either a primary mode as iden-
compartment. The blue area of the tified by the symbols on the control, or
scale indicates cooler temperatures a blend of two of these modes. The
while the red area indicates warmer closer the setting is to a particular
temperatures. symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
• Panel • Floor
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru- Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to small amount flowing through the defrost and
direct airflow. side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be • Mix
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. side window demist outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require
• Bi-Level
extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
Air is directed through the panel and floor out-
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
lets.
windshield.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
• Defrost
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
Air is directed through the windshield and side
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
window demist outlets. Use this mode with
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
cool conditions.
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix • The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
and Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed. This de- because of moisture build-up inside the vehicle. Select
humidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
• Recirculation Control when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
Use this button to block the flow of outside control is set to panel or panel / floor. 4
air from coming into the passenger compart-
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ment. A light will illuminate when the sys-
ing the mode control selection.
tem is in recirculation mode. Only use the
recirculation mode as a temporary means to block out Air Conditioning Control
any outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A
interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning
humid weather. System is engaged
NOTE: NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
• Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• MAX A/C Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation Equipped
buttons at the same time.
• Economy Mode
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
off the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Operation
The Infrared Climate Control System automatically
maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the
comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. To
accomplish this, the system gathers information from the
cabin infrared sensor mounted between the sun-visors 2. Dial in the temperature you would
and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle. like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob.
The controls on the climate control provide the system
with operator input. Other sensors take account of ve-
hicle speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and
engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the
system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, air- 4
Once the comfort level is selected, the system will main-
flow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of
tain that level automatically using the heating system.
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning,
temperature even under changing conditions.
the system will automatically make the adjustment.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO. the “O” (Off) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only. 72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: Manual Operation

• The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time This system offers a full complement of manual override
without affecting automatic operation. features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
air conditioning is not necessary.
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser: lo-
Operation Chart that follows for details.
cated in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor

change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions. small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru- • Mix
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
direct airflow. side window demist outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
windshield.
• Bi-Level
• Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor out-
Air is directed through the windshield and side
lets.
window demist outlets. Use this mode with
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there maximum blower and temperature settings for best
is a difference in temperature between the upper and windshield and side window defrosting.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
• Air Conditioner Control NOTE:

Press this button to turn on the air conditioning • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
during manual operation only. When the air position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
air will flow through the outlets selected with the lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
turn off the air conditioning. An LED in the button floor mode in order to improve window clearing.
illuminates when manual compressor operation is Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
4
selected. modes are selected.
• Recirculation Control • Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
The system will automatically control recir- to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
culation. However, pressing the Recircula-
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
tion Control button will temporarily put the
system in recirculation mode (ten minutes). Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
This can be used when outside conditions such as interior air to condense on windows and hamper
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-
system will return to normal AUTO mode function tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
and the LED will turn off. control button to blink and then turn off.
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you Summer Operation

can temporarily put the system into Recirculation The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
Mode by pressing the Recirculation Button. However, must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
Button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual
turn off. This tells you that you are unable to go into for proper coolant selection.
recirculation mode at this time. If you would like the
Winter Operation
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
move the Mode Knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then is not recommended because it may cause window
press the Recirculation Button. This feature reduces fogging.
the possibility of window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Operating Tips Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
suggested control settings for various weather conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
tions. air and high blower settings. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging Outside Air Intake

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win- enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but slush, and snow.
rainy or humid weather. 4
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for The A/C Air Filter will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel
long periods as fogging may occur. and agricultural smells. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
Side Window Demisters
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
in Section 7 of this manual for A/C Air Filter service
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
manual for filter service intervals.
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 m Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 ▫ Shift Lock Manual Override — If Equipped . . . 281
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . 277 ▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 283
5
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 ▫ 4–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or m Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 288
–29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Clutch Interlocking Ignition System . . . . . . . . 288
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ 6-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
m Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
m Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 280
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ MP1522 Command-Tract Transfer Case — m Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
m Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ MP3022 Selec-Trac IIt Transfer Case —
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
m On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
m Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ When To Use 4WD Low Range . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ TSC (Trailer Sway Control) – If Equipped . . . . 318
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ HSA (Hill Start Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ HDC (Hill Descent Control) – If Equipped . . . 322
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light & ESP/TCS
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
m Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 332 m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 333 m Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
m Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 5
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . 340
m Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
m Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 378
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Towing – 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Towing — 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
STARTING PROCEDURES starting vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.
4WD Models Only
WARNING!
To enhance off-road performance, 4-wheel drive models
Do not leave children or animals inside parked equipped with a manual transmission will start with or
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may without pressing the clutch pedal when in 4-wheel drive
cause serious injury or death. low range. The 4 LOW indicator light will illuminate
when the transfer case is in 4-wheel drive low range. 5
Automatic Transmission Normal Starting
Start the engine with the selector lever in the “N”
(Neutral) or “P” (Park) position. Apply the brake before NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
shifting to any driving range. engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start, turn the ignition
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
switch to the START position and release it when the
in “N” (Neutral) and depress the clutch pedal before
engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.
For vehicles equipped with Tip Start, turn the ignition If Engine Fails to Start
switch to the START position and release it as soon as the
starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, WARNING!
and it will disengage automatically when the engine is
running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C) it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
externally powered electric engine block heater (available fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
from your dealer) is recommended. the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 of
this manual for proper jump starting procedures
and follow them carefully.
Without Tip Start seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce- the engine is running smoothly.
dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Ex-
engine is flooded.
treme Cold Weather” procedures.
CAUTION! With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the 5
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
15 seconds before trying again. the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
enough power to continue running when the key is occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the normal starting procedure.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
seconds before trying again. to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded three-wire extension cord.
After Starting WARNING!

The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up. Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt AC electrical cord could
WARNING! cause electrocution.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are
cause serious injury or death. expected to last for several days.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
CAUTION! It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P”
(Park) or “N” (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
ing precautions are not observed:
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
• Shift into “P” (Park) only after the vehicle has forward or in “R” (Reverse). You could lose control of
come to a complete stop. the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
• Shift into or out of “R” (Reverse) only after the into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from “R” (Reverse), “P” (Park), or “N” Shift Lock Manual Override — If Equipped
(Neutral) into any forward gear when the engine is Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual
above idle speed. override. The manual override may be used in the event
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot that the shift lever should fail to move from “P” (Park)
is firmly on the brake pedal. with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal
depressed. To operate the shift lock manual override,
perform the following steps:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.

2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove the
shift lock manual override cover, which is located on the
PRNDL bezel.
3. Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
4. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override
opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.
5. Move the shift lever into the “N” (Neutral) position.

6. The vehicle may then be started in “N” (Neutral).
Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized
dealer, if the shift lock manual override has been used.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System

This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of “P” (Park) and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. Always depress the brake pedal first, before
moving the gear selector out of “P” (Park).
4–Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from “D” (Drive) to “P” (Park) or “R” (Reverse)
(or from “P” or “R” to “D”) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. 5
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
selector lever between these gears.
Automatic Shift Controls
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from “P” (Park)
or “N” (Neutral) position into another gear range.
“P” (Park)
WARNING!
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P”
this range. Never use “P” (Park) while the vehicle is in (Park) or “N” (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first, brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
and then place the selector in “P” (Park) position. forward or in “R” (Reverse). You could lose control of
the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
WARNING! into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Never use “P” (Park) position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and “R” (Reverse)
possible injury or damage. Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
“N” (Neutral) “1” (First)

Shift into “N” (Neutral) when the vehicle is standing for For hard pulling at low speeds in mud, sand, snow, or on
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine steep grades. Begins and stays in low gear with no
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you upshift. Provides engine compression braking at low
must leave the vehicle. speeds.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any Overdrive Operation
other reason with selector lever in “N” (Neutral) can The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
result in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recre- tronically controlled fourth speed (Overdrive). The trans-
ational Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled mission will automatically shift from 3rd gear to Over- 5
Vehicle” in Section 6 of this manual. drive if the following conditions are present:
“D” (Drive) • The transmission selector is in “D” (Drive).
For most city and highway driving.
• The vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
“2” (Second) km/h).
For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pave-
• The “TOW/HAUL” button has not been activated.
ment or in mud and snow. Begins at a stop in low gear
with automatic upshift to 2nd gear. Will not shift to 3rd.
NOTE: The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive

• If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
the transmission may not shift into Overdrive. It will speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
however, automatically select the most desirable gear
When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode
for operation at this temperature. Normal operation
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
will resume when the transmission fluid temperature
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
has risen to a suitable level.
curs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve
• If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the performance and reduce the potential for transmission
transmission will automatically select the most desir- overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
able gear for operation at this temperature. If the operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, the transmission will
transmission temperature becomes hot enough, the shift to 3rd gear.
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illu-
NOTE: “TOW/HAUL” mode locks out Overdrive.
minate, and the transmission may downshift out of
Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After a
cool down, the transmission will resume normal op-
eration.
Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-
tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
Transmission Limp Home Mode 5
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the
Tow/Haul Button transmission shifts automatically into second gear if the
vehicle speed is appropriate. If not, it will wait until the
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
conditions are appropriate and then it will shift into
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
second gear. The transmission will then remain in second
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
gear despite the forward gear selected. “P” (Park), “R”
normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired,
(Reverse), and “N” (Neutral) will continue to operate.
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
A Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
for service without damaging the transmission. To reset
Clutch Interlocking Ignition System
the transmission, perform the following procedure:
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission are
1. Stop the vehicle. equipped with a clutch interlock safety feature. The
clutch pedal must be fully depressed to allow cranking of
2. Move the selector lever to the “P” (Park) position.
the engine.
3. Turn off the engine; be sure to turn the key to the
To enhance off-road performance, 4-wheel drive models
LOCK position.
equipped with a manual transmission will start with or
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, and then restart the without pressing the clutch pedal when in 4-wheel drive
engine. low range. The 4 LOW indicator light will illuminate
when the transfer case is in 4-wheel drive low range.
5. Move the selector lever to the desired gear range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists, “P”
(Park), “R” (Reverse), and “N” (Neutral) will continue to
operate. Only Second gear range will operate in the “D”
(Drive) position. Have the transmission checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
6-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the

vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
5
Follow the shift pattern on the gearshift knob.
NOTE: The backup lights will come on when your Manual Shift Controls
vehicle is in “R” (Reverse) gear and the ignition is in the
ON position.
• Do not operate at sustained high engine or road

WARNING!
speeds in lower gears. Engine damage may result.
When parking your vehicle, always leave a manual • Do not downshift into a low gear while traveling at too
transmission in first gear and apply the parking high a speed for that gear. Engine, clutch, or transmis-
brake fully to guard against vehicle movement and sion damage may result.
possible injury or damage. Never use any gear as a
substitute for the parking brake. • Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This causes
heat buildup and damages the clutch.
• When you slow down or go up a grade, downshift as
CAUTION! speed requires or the engine may overheat.
• Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the
To drive as safely as possible and to prolong the life
clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged.
of your manual transmission, follow these tips:
• During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
• Before shifting from a forward gear into reverse, or up. This is normal.
from reverse to a forward gear, stop vehicle com-
pletely. Otherwise, accelerated transmission wear may • Push in the clutch pedal completely when shifting.
result. Otherwise, transmission or clutch damage may result.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between a Recommended Manual Transmission Downshifting
forward gear and reverse, do not spin wheels faster Speeds
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may To prevent clutch and transmission damage, your vehicle
result. should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those
listed in the chart below:
Recommended Manual Transmission Shifting
Speeds Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH
The manufacturer recommends that you use the shift (KM/H)
speeds listed in the chart below. Gear 6th to 5th to 4th to 3rd to 2nd to
Selec- 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) tion 5
En- Maxi- 85 mph 75 mph 55 mph 35 mph 20 mph
Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
gine mum (135 (120 (88 (56 (32
3.7L Accel. 15 (24) 24 34 (55) 47 56 Speed km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h)
(39) (76) (90)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 27 (43) 37 41
(31) (60) (66)
• 4-wheel drive high range.

CAUTION!
• Neutral.
Failure to follow the recommended downshifting
speeds may cause the engine to over speed and/or • 4-wheel drive low range.
damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2-wheel
depressed. drive position (2WD) for normal street and highway
conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION When additional traction is required, select the transfer
case 4WD Lock position or 4WD Low position. This
MP1522 Command-TracT Transfer Case — If position locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft
Equipped together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at
Operating Information & Precautions the same speed.
The Command-Tract transfer case provides four posi- Use the transfer case Neutral (N) position for recreational
tions: towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this
• 2 (rear) wheel drive high range. section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of
Neutral (N).
CAUTION! WARNING!
• Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front wheels • You or others could be injured if you leave the
or rear wheels are spinning. The MP1522 Command-Tract vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging
therefore the speed of the front driveshaft and rear drive-
the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N)
shaft must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting
while only the front wheels or rear wheels are spinning can position disengages both the front driveshaft and
cause damage to the transfer case. rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will
allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission
• The 4WD Lock position and 4WD Low position are in-
position. The parking brake should always be
tended for loose or slippery road surfaces only. Driving in
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
these positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo- • Always engage the parking brake when powering
nents. down the vehicle if the “SERV 4WD” light is
• When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD posi- allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
tion or 4WD LOCK position at a given road speed. Take injury.
care not to over-speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h). • Since 4-wheel drive provides improved traction,
• Proper operation of 4-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and
of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road condi-
difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case. tions permit. You or others could be injured.
Shift Positions 4WD Lock

The electronic transfer case switch is located on the center 4-Wheel-Drive High Range - Locks the front driveshaft
console next to the gear selector lever. and rear driveshaft together and forces the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose or slippery road surfaces only.
4WD Low
4-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4-wheel drive
that locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft to-
gether and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). This position allows engine
starting without depressing the clutch pedal on vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission. Refer to “Clutch
Interlocking Ignition System” under “Manual Transmis-
4WD Control Switch
sion” or to “Starting Procedures” in this section for
2WD details.
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
N NOTE: The “SERV 4WD” warning light monitors the

Neutral - Disengages both the front driveshaft and rear electric shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after
driveshaft from the powertrain. To be used for flat engine start up, or it illuminates during driving, it means
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that
Towing” in this section for more information. service is required.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Shifting Procedures
The 4WD indicator lights are located in the instrument
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
cluster. The “N” (Neutral) indicator light is located on the
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
4WD Control Switch. If there is no indicator light on or 5
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position
flashing, the transfer case position is 2-wheel drive
will remain ON, and the newly selected position indica-
(2WD). If the indicator light is on, the desired position
tor light will continue to flash until all the requirements
(4WD LOCK, 4WD LOW, or NEUTRAL) has been ob-
for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift,
tained.
move the 4WD Control Switch back to the original
If One or More Shift Requirements are not met: position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five (5) seconds, and try the shift again.
• An indicator light will flash.
• The transfer case will not shift.
2WD to 4WD Lock reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to com-
Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position. plete the shift. There may be a delay up to 10 seconds
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in spinning.
motion, the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if
• Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experi-
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after mov-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or
ing the 4WD Control Switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
excessive loading.
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either OFF or RUNNING. This shift cannot be 4WD Lock to 4WD Low
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
NOTE:
to the vehicle or its occupants
• The 4-wheel drive system will not allow shifts be-
tween 2WD and 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2-3
spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected mph (3-5 km/h) using the “Preferred Procedure” or
position indicator light will flash and the original completely stopped using the “Alternate Procedure.”
position indicator light will remain ON. At this time,
Preferred Procedure 2. With the ignition switch in the ON position, and the
engine OFF or RUNNING, shift the transmission into
1. With the engine RUNNING, slow the vehicle speed to
“N” (Neutral) (automatic transmission), or depress the
2-3 mph (3-5 km/h).
clutch pedal (manual transmission).
2. Shift the transmission into “N” (Neutral) (automatic
3. Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
transmission), or depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-
mission). 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission into gear (automatic
3. While still rolling, move the 4WD Control Switch to
transmission), or release the clutch pedal (manual trans-
the desired position. 5
mission).
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
NOTE:
• Steps 1 and 2 in the “Preferred Procedure” and the
“Alternate Procedure” are requirements for shifting
mission).
the transfer case. If these requirements are not met
Alternate Procedure prior to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt
is in process, then the indicator light will flash, and the
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
current transfer case position will be maintained. To
retry a shift, move the 4WD Control Switch back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements • Neutral.

have been met, wait five (5) seconds, and try the shift
• 4-wheel drive low range.
again.
This transfer case is intended to be driven in either the
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
2-wheel drive position (2WD) or the 4-wheel drive Auto
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
position (4WD Auto) for normal street and highway
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads.
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing. For added capability when traversing steep grades,
rough terrain, or extremely poor traction surfaces, select
MP3022 Selec-Trac IIT Transfer Case — If
the transfer case 4WD Low position. This position locks
Equipped
the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and
Operating Information & Precautions forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
The Selec-Trac IIt active on-demand transfer case pro- speed while multiplying engine torque.
vides four positions:
Use the transfer case Neutral (N) position for recreational
• 2 (rear) wheel drive high range. towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this
section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of
• 4-wheel drive auto high range.
Neutral (N).
CAUTION! WARNING!
• The 4WD Low position is intended for loose or • You or others could be injured if you leave the
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in this posi- vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
tion on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in- Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging
creased tire wear and damage to the driveline the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N)
position disengages both the front driveshaft and
components. rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will
• When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission
engine speed is approximately three times that of position. The parking brake should always be 5
the 2WD position or 4WD AUTO position at a applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
given road speed. Take care not to over-speed the • Always engage the parking brake when powering
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). down the vehicle if the “SERV 4WD” light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
• Proper operation of 4-wheel drive vehicles de- allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
pends on tires of equal size, type, and circumfer- injury.
ence on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can • Since 4-wheel drive provides improved traction,
cause damage to the transfer case. there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and
stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road con-
ditions permit. You or others could be injured.
Shift Positions 4WD Auto

The electronic transfer case switch is located on the center 4-Wheel-Drive Auto High Range – This active on-
console next to the gear selector lever. demand position makes available optimum traction for a
wide range of conditions, while maximizing driver con-
venience. This position is always in 4-wheel drive mode,
with a normal 42% front axle, 58% rear axle torque split.
The system also anticipates and prevents slip by redirect-
ing torque as necessary, up to 100% to the front or rear
axle, if needed.
4WD Low
4-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4-wheel drive
that locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft to-
gether and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not
4WD Control Switch
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). This position allows engine
2WD starting without depressing the clutch pedal on vehicles
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and equipped with a manual transmission. Refer to “Clutch
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
Interlocking Ignition System” under “Manual Transmis- If One or More Shift Requirements are not met:
sion” or to “Starting Procedures” in this section for
• An indicator light will flash.
details.
• The transfer case will not shift.
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front driveshaft and rear NOTE: The “SERV 4WD” warning light monitors the
driveshaft from the powertrain. To be used for flat electric shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational engine start up, or it illuminates during driving, it means
Towing” in this section for more information. that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. 5
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The 4WD indicator lights are located in the instrument Shifting Procedures
cluster. The “N” (Neutral) indicator light is located on the
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
4WD Control Switch. If there is no indicator light on or
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
flashing, the transfer case position is 2-wheel drive
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position
(2WD). If the indicator light is on, the desired position
will remain ON, and the newly selected position indica-
(4WD AUTO, 4WD LOW, or NEUTRAL) has been ob-
tor light will continue to flash until all the requirements
tained.
for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift,
move the 4WD Control Switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been Preferred Procedure
met, wait five (5) seconds, and try the shift again.
1. With the engine RUNNING, slow the vehicle speed to
2WD to 4WD Auto 2-3 mph (3-5 km/h).
Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
2. Shift the transmission into “N” (Neutral) (automatic
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD Auto can be done with the
transmission), or depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is stopped,
mission).
the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either OFF or RUNNING. This shift cannot be 3. While still rolling, move the 4WD Control Switch to
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. the desired position.
2WD or 4WD Auto to 4WD Low 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some gear noise flashing), shift the transmission into gear (automatic
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental transmission), or release the clutch pedal (manual trans-
to the vehicle or its occupants. mission).
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2-3 Alternate Procedure
mph (3-5 km/h) using the “Preferred Procedure” or
completely stopped using the “Alternate Procedures.”
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the original position, make certain all shift requirements
engine OFF or RUNNING, shift the transmission into have been met, wait five (5) seconds, and try the shift
“N” (Neutral) (automatic transmission), or depress the again.
clutch pedal (manual transmission).
3. Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position. shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
position, then the shift will not take place, and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
mission). ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
5
NOTE: Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
• Steps 1 and 2 in the “Preferred Procedure” and the narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
“Alternate Procedure” are requirements for shifting wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
the transfer case. If these requirements are not met characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
prior to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt ordinary cars.
is in process, then the indicator light will flash, and the An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
current transfer case position will be maintained. To view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
retry a shift, move the 4WD Control Switch back to the They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than low- Driving Through Water
slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or water, there are a number of precautions that must be
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, considered before entering the water:
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover. CAUTION!
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8
When To Use 4WD Low Range km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD Low for additional a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, through water may cause damage that may not be
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
low-speed pulling power. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand Driving through water more than a few inches deep will
where additional low speed pulling power is needed. require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam-
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be age to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try
avoided when in 4WD Low range. to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and
location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than Maintenance

5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects. After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, axle, transfer
Flowing Water
case) to assure they have not been contaminated. Con-
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
taminated fluids and lubricants (milky, foamy in appear-
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
ance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
prevent component damage.
flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches. The
flowing water can erode the streambed causing your Driving In Snow, Mud and Sand
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional 5
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
drifting. gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD Low if necessary.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section.
Standing Water
Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches,
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave ef-
and traction will be lost.
fects. Maximum speed in 20 inches of water is less than 5
mph (8 km/h). Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, be-
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
WARNING!
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side. If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD Low. Use tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
first gear and 4WD Low for very steep hills. down a hill in R (Reverse) gear carefully. Never back
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a down a hill in N (Neutral) using only the brake.
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and
shift to R (Reverse). Back slowly down the hill allowing Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill-always
the compression braking of the engine to help regulate drive straight up or down.
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
the tires. turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
case to 4WD Low range. Let the vehicle go slowly down exhaust system for damage.
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
vehicle speed and direction.
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking values specified in the Service Manual.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis- 5
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
sion whenever possible.
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
After Driving Off-Road propeller shafts.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
similar dirty conditions, have brake rotors, wheels,
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
soon as possible.
your vehicle ready when you need it.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING!
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might ignition ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru-
not have full braking power when you need it to ment cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull
prevent an accident. If you have been operating your up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked completely.
and cleaned as necessary. NOTE: The instrument cluster “Brake Warning Light”
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in the vehicle.
mud, slush, or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked, and

the gear selector lever is in the “P” (Park) position
(automatic transmission) or “R” (Reverse) or 1st gear
(manual transmission). When parking on a hill, you
should apply the parking brake before placing the gear
selector lever in “P” (Park); otherwise, the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the selector out of “P” (Park).
Parking Brake
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the

WARNING!
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
• Always apply the parking brake fully when leav- uphill grade.
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or The parking brake should always be applied whenever
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic the driver is not in the vehicle.
transmission in “P” (Park) or a manual transmis-
sion in “R” (Reverse) or 1st gear. Failure to do so ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
injury. driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
could be injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
surfaces.
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake accurate signals for the computer.
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
WARNING! WARNING!
Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
of braking effectiveness. makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed self-
test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot
lightly on the brake while this test is occurring, you may 5
feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow. This is normal.
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop.
The pump motor makes a low humming noise during
operation, which is normal.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
the natural laws of physics from acting on the detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering by improperly installed after-market radios or
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition telephones.
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro- System is functioning.
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. WARNING!
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety follow these tips:
or the safety of others.
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the build up between the tire tread and the road. This
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis- ability, and control.
tances, or brake damage.
• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated brak- may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos- slow speeds.
sible. 5
POWER STEERING
• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up, The standard power steering system will give you good
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
driving on slippery roads, in close quarter maneuver- steering capability if power assist is lost.
ing, parking, or stopping.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering

CAUTION!
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system. Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any occur.
way damage the steering system.
WARNING! ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
Continued operation with reduced power steering brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. system includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), TCS
Service should be obtained as soon as possible. (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake Assist System),
HSA (Hill Start Assist), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation),
and ESP (Electronic Stability Program). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Two additional electronic brake control system options

WARNING!
are HDC (Hill Descent Control) and TSC (Trailer Sway
Control). Your vehicle may be equipped with one or both ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent the
of these options. natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents, in-
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-
5
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
manual for more information about ABS. less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
TCS (Traction Control System) BAS (Brake Assist System)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
“Partial Off” mode or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to “ESP
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
(Electronic Stability Program)” in this section for more
information.
ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)

WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the natu- monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
dents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the 5
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
the safety of others. other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the road-
way, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESP is in “Full Off”
mode. Refer to ESP (Electronic Stability Program) for a
complete explanation of the available ESP modes.
TSC (Trailer Sway Control) – If Equipped

WARNING!
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi- sively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM (Electronic is functioning, the “ESP/TCS Indicator” light will flash,
Roll Mitigation) cannot prevent all wheel lift or the engine power will be reduced, and you will feel the
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the brake being applied to individual wheels in an attempt to
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. Only a stop the trailer from swaying.
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in
dents. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle the “Partial Off” mode and “Full Off” mode.
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
HSA (Hill Start Assist)

WARNING!
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate
• TSC (Trailer Sway Control) cannot stop all trailers the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If
from swaying. Always use caution when towing a the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
trailer and follow the tongue weight recommenda- HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short
tions. Refer to ”Vehicle Loading” and “Trailer period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this
Towing” in this section for more information be- time expires, the system will release brake pressure and
fore towing a trailer with your vehicle. the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system
will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of
• If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the throttle applied. 5
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway. The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury. • The vehicle must be stopped.
• The vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline.
• The Gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e. vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in reverse gear).
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,

WARNING!
the HSA will work in reverse gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission There may be situations where the HSA (Hill Start
is in “P” (Park). Assist) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the such as on minor hills (i.e., less than 7%), or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not
HSA will work in reverse gear, neutral, and all forward
a substitute for active driving involvement. It is
gears. always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
Towing with HSA

HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an
incline while towing a trailer.
Disabling & Enabling HSA

WARNING!
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your current setting, proceed as follows:
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Hill Start Assist,”
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the under 9Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually
activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the 5
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal. following steps:
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. seconds.
Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission 1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
in “P” (Park) or a manual transmission in “R” straight forward).
(Reverse) or 1st gear.
2. Shift the transmission into “P” (Park) (automatic
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
transmission) or “N” (Neutral) (manual transmission).
accident or serious personal injury.
3. Apply the parking brake. HDC (Hill Descent Control) – If Equipped

HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving.
4. Start the engine.
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in
5. Release the clutch pedal (manual transmission). off-road driving conditions by applying the brakes when
necessary.
6. Rotate the steering wheel 1⁄2 turn to the left.
When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and activates
7. Press the “ESP OFF” button located in the lower
when the vehicle is descending a hill. HDC speed may be
switch bank below the climate control four times within
adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions. The
twenty seconds. The “ESP/TCS Indicator” light should
speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
turn on and turn off two times.
Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an 1st 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
additional 1⁄2 turn to the right.
2nd 3 mph (4.5 km/h)
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then D (Drive) 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed R (Reverse) 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
properly, the “ESP/TCS Indicator” light will blink sev- N (Neutral) 3 mph (4.5 km/h)
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled.
However, the driver can override HDC operation by
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the
to its previous setting.
HDC control speed. Conversely, if more speed is desired The “Hill Descent” button is located in the lower switch
during HDC control, the accelerator pedal will increase bank below the climate control.
vehicle speed in the usual manner. When either the brake
or the accelerator is released, HDC will control the
vehicle at the original set speed.
NOTE: HDC is available on vehicles equipped with the
MP1522 transfer case.
• The transfer case must be in 4WD low range to enable
HDC. 5
• HDC is enabled only when the “Hill Descent Control
Indicator” light in the instrument cluster is on solid.
• HDC will NOT activate when the automatic transmis-
sion is in “P” (Park). Hill Descent Button
• HDC will NOT activate on level ground. Enabling HDC

Shift the transfer case into 4WD low range.
• HDC will NOT activate at vehicle speeds above 30 Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this
mph (50 km/h). section for transfer case operation information.
Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
Descent Control Indicator” light in the instru- that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
ment cluster will turn on solid. it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
NOTE: If the transfer case is not in 4WD low range, the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
“Hill Descent Control Indicator” light will flash for 5 the condition of oversteer or understeer.
seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
Disabling HDC appropriate for the steering wheel position.
1. Press the “Hill Descent” button or shift the transfer • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
case out of 4WD low range. The “Hill Descent Control appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Indicator” light in the instrument cluster will turn off.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) The 9ESP/TCS Indicator” light located in the
This system enhances directional control and stability of instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor- tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
rects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by active. The 9ESP/TCS Indicator” light also
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine flashes when TCS is active. If the 9ESP/TCS Indicator”
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
the desired path.
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESP
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road system has up to three operating modes: “ESP On”
conditions. “Partial Off,” and “Full Off.”
ESP On — 2WD Vehicles & 4WD Vehicles in 2WD &
WARNING!
4WD High Range
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the This is the normal operating mode for ESP when operat-
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, ing a 2WD vehicle. It is also the normal mode for
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing operating a 4WD vehicle in 2WD or 4WD high range. The
road conditions. ESP cannot prevent accidents, in- ESP system will be in “ESP On” mode whenever the 5
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro- shifted out of 4WD low range. This mode should be used
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can for most driving situations. ESP should only be turned to
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP- “Partial Off” or “Full Off” for specific reasons as noted.
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- Refer to “Partial Off” and to “Full Off” for additional
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize information.
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Partial Off — 2WD Vehicles & 4WD Vehicles in 2WD

& 4WD High Range
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
TCS and ESP activation, which allows for more wheel
spin than what ESP normally allows.
The “ESP OFF” button is located in the lower switch bank
below the climate Control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily depress the “ESP OFF” button and
the 9ESP/TCS Indicator” light will illuminate. To turn the
ESP on again, momentarily depress the 9ESP OFF9 button
and the 9ESP/TCS Indicator” light will turn off. This will ESP Off Button
restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the “ESP
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph. At speeds over 40
depressing the “ESP OFF” button. This may be done mph, the system automatically switches to “Partial Off”
while the vehicle is in motion. mode, described above. When the vehicle speed returns
to less than 35 mph, the ESP system will return to “Full
Full Off — 4WD Vehicles in 4WD High & 4WD Low
Off” mode. The “ESP/TCS Indicator” light is always
Range
illuminated when ESP is off. To turn ESP on again,
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and
momentarily depress the “ESP Off” button. This will
off-road use when ESP stability features could inhibit
restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions.
NOTE: 5
The “ESP OFF” button is located in the lower switch bank
• “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESP in 4WD
below the climate Control. To enter “Full Off” mode,
low range. Therefore, ESP system will be in this mode
depress and hold the “ESP Off” button for 5 seconds
whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD low range or
while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running.
the transfer case is shifted into 4WD low range.
After 5 seconds, the “ESP/TCS Indicator” light will
illuminate and an “ESP Off” message will appear in the • The “ESP OFF” message will display and a chime will
odometer. Press and release the trip odometer button sound when the gear selector is moved from any
located on the instrument cluster to turn off this message. position to the “P” (Park) position and then moved out
of the “P” (Park) position. This will occur even if the
In this mode, ESP and TCS are turned off (except for the
message was cleared previously.
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until
turns on continuously with the engine running, a mal-

WARNING!
function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle system, or both. If this light remains on after several
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emer- ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
gency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off” authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road diagnosed and corrected.
use. NOTE:
• 9The 9ESP/TCS Indicator” light and the 9ESP/BAS
Malfunction Indicator” light will turn on momentarily
ESP/BAS Warning Light & ESP/TCS Indicator each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com- • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
bined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/BAS will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
Malfunction Indicator” light and the “ESP/ • The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
TCS Indicator” light in the instrument cluster sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
both turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
ON position. They should both turn off with the engine maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
running. If the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator” light
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION • European Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
Tire Markings
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced- 5
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
NOTE:
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded • High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: P215/65R15 95H. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and 5
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN) located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
Tire Placard Location 4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec- pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
tion of this manual. your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
calculated in Step 4. and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
kg). 5
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the accidents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overload them. tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that
result in tire failure.
5
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You
Tire Pressure
could lose control of your vehicle.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the
other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
2. Economy— Tire Inflation Pressures

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side “B” pillar.
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict-
able steering response. Tire Placard Location
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
vehicle to drift left or right. inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
properly inflated even when they are under inflated. temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION!
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This the winter.
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire 5
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial-Ply Tires

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire ways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading them with other types of tires.
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING! Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in

the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above dealer for radial tire repairs.
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on Tire Spinning
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 35
mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
5
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
to help you in determining when your tires should be grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
replaced. becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
factors including but not limited to: with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Tire pressure
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Distance driven wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
WARNING! lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You The service description and load identification will be
could lose control and have an accident resulting in found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
serious injury or death. equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of may result in false speedometer and odometer
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension readings.
dimensions and performance characteristics, result-
ing in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components. Alignment and Balance
You could lose control and have an accident resulting Poor suspension alignment may result in:
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and 5
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your • Fast tire wear.
vehicle.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, wear.
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could • Vehicle pull to right or left.
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident. Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad- Alignment will not correct this problem. See your autho-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire rized dealer for proper diagnosis.
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.

CAUTION!
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires, or chains, observe the following
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear. precautions:
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with tires other than
P235/65R17 tires. There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and
TIRE CHAINS you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle.
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet • Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the components, it is important that only chains in good condition are used.
Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage. Remove
manufacturer. In addition, only install tire chains on the damaged parts of the chain before further use.
P235/65R17 or smaller tires. • Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten
after driving about 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with
a loaded vehicle.
• Use on Rear Wheels only.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of instal-
lation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from
the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ- Follow the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
ing link and cable (radial) chains. manual for the recommended tire rotation frequency.
Remember, more frequent rotation is permissible if de-
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS sired. Also, correct for anything causing rapid or unusual
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at wear prior to performing the tire rotation.
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns. shown in the following diagram.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
5
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
EQUIPPED is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle • The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
recommended cold placard pressure. pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-
pressure warning limit for any reason, including low
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
temperature effects and natural pressure loss through
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
the tire.
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set • The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires – pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
General Information” in this section for information order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire turn off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures.

CAUTION!
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
receive this information. equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
− For example, your vehicle may have a recom- warning have been established for the tire size
mended cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient tempera- operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ture is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
5
will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24
psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
Telltale light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire may result.
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended toring Sensor.
cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire the tire.
failure or condition.
Base System — If Equipped
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
readings to the Receiver Module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
stopping ability. tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
• Receiver Module
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni- • 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
toring Telltale light.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the information.
four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure
Check TPMS Warning
in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire.
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the low-
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The 5
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or occur due to any of the following:
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
sensors.
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pres- 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
sures, the system will automatically update and the Tire that affects radio wave signals.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. The
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel NOTE:

housings.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
NOTE: 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni-
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
tored by the TPMS.
mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
(25 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light, as long as
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
in any of the four active road tires.
Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active • 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 wheel-wells)
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
to receive this information.
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Premium System — If Equipped Center (EVIC)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full 5
readings to the Receiver Module. size spare can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
Light to illuminate or the chime to sound. However, it
and to maintain the proper pressure.
will cause a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to
The TPMS consists of the following components: display in the EVIC.
• Receiver Module Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in
Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic show- the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
pressure values flashing. updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-
ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9 message for 3 seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault Vehicles with Full Size Spare
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
Light will no longer flash, and the 9CHECK TPM SYS- has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni-
TEM9 message will no longer display, and a pressure tored by the TPMS.
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
can occur due to any of the following: that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPM Telltale
showing the low tire pressure value flashing. Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF, as flashing pressure value.
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warn- 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
ing limit in any of the four active road tires. mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and
4. The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure the EVIC will display a 9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9 message
value. The EVIC will also display a “SPARE LOW for 3 seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
PRESSURE” message to remind you to service the flat pressure value.
tire. 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
NOTE:
seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
Vehicles with Compact Spare display a 9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9 message for 3 seconds
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor value.
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, following licenses:
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The FUEL REQUIREMENTS
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above Your engine is designed to meet all emis-
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this sions regulations and provide excellent
information. fuel economy and performance when us- 5
ing high quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
General Information line having an octane rating of 87. The use
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and of premium gasoline is not recommended.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the Under normal conditions, the use of premium gasoline
following conditions: will not provide a benefit over high quality regular
• This device may not cause harmful interference. gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in
poorer performance.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
eration. your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline fuel system components.
before considering service for the vehicle.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties ates are required in some areas of the country during the
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom- Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci- your vehicle.
fications if they are available.
CAUTION!
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe- and driveability problems and may damage critical
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- fuel system components.
prove air quality.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Materials Added to Fuel
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Metha-
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
nol.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT In Gasoline detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel. 5
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
Fuel System Cautions
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
CAUTION!
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; performance:
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more impor-
tant to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada,
because MMT can be used at levels higher than those
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Carbon Monoxide Warnings
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
and damage the emission control system. WARNING!
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or monoxide poisoning:
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance. • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
products contain high concentrations of methanol. garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not stopped in an open area with the engine running for
the responsibility of the manufacturer. more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-

nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
5
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is designed for use with this
vehicle.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
system could result from using an improper fuel the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). tank filled.
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into • Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
the fuel system. running.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc- • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
tion Indicator Light to turn on. portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top could be burned. Always place gas containers on
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel the ground while filling.
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE: damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in-
strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not VEHICLE LOADING
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight- Certification Label
ened each time the vehicle is refueled. As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
tank is full. label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
5
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
“gASCAP” message will display in the instrument clus- Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
ter. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is heard. included on this label and indicates the Month, Day, and
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight- Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
ened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
message. If the problem persists, the message will appear (VIN).
the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maxi- components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
mum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear cle’s GVWR.
GAWR are not exceeded.
Tire Size
Payload The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the capacity of this tire size.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Rim Size
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front listed.
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
Inflation Pressure
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
added.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
Loading the brakes operate. 5
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined CAUTION!
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer- or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing your vehicle.
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
TRAILER TOWING Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

In this section, you will find safety tips and information The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
review this information to tow your load as efficiently trailer in its 9loaded and ready for operation9 condition.
and safely as possible. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
WARNING!
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs. (1 587
you in understanding the following information: kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-
distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) vehicle. If you use a standard weight- carrying hitch,
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the total you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an
allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, accident.
passengers, cargo, and tongue weight. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Tongue Weight (TW)

The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the Tongue weight (TW) is the downward force exerted on
total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in- less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You
clude a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
driver).
Frontal Area
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum of the front of a trailer.
capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load 5
Trailer Sway Control — Electronic
over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you
Refer to “TSC (Trailer Sway Control)” under “Electronic
do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Brake Control System” in this section for information on
this system.
WARNING!
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
control of the vehicle and have an accident. the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized WARNING!
trailers.
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
Weight-Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever- formance, and could result in an accident.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent Vehicle dealer for additional information.
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System

Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification

Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2,000 lbs Class Max. GTW
(907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the (Gross Trailer Wt.)
standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
Class II - Medium 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.
Duty
See your dealer for package content.
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for Class IV - Extra 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Heavy Duty
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
your vehicle.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Max. GTW towable for
your given drivetrain.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Model GCWR (Gross Com- Frontal Area Max. GTW Tongue Wt.
bined Wt. Rating) (Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note)
3.7L/6-Speed Manual 4x2 8,500 lbs (3 855 kg) 40 Sq. Ft. (3.72 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
square meters)
3.7L/6-Speed Manual 4x4 8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40 Sq. Ft. (3.72 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
square meters)
3.7L/Automatic 4x2 7,150 lbs (3 243 kg) 32 Sq. Ft. (2.97 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
square meters) 5
3.7L/Automatic 4x4 7,400 lbs ( 3 356 kg) 32 Sq. Ft. (2.97 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
square meters)
3.7L/Automatic w/ 4x2 9,850 lbs (4 468 kg) 64 Sq. Ft. (5.94 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
Cooler square meters)
3.7L/Automatic 4x4 10,100 lbs (4 581 kg) 64 Sq. Ft. (5.94 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
w/Cooler square meters)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it
should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety
Information” in this section.
When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) between 3,500 Lbs (1 588 kg) and 5,000 Lbs (2 268 kg)
The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine/transmission
combinations, ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch.
Engine/ Model GCWR (Gross Com- Frontal Area Max. GTW Tongue Wt.
Transmission bined Wt. Rating) (Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note)
3.7L/ 4x2 9,850 lbs (4 468 kg) 64 Sq. Ft. (5.94 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) 500 lbs (227 kg)
Automatic w/ square meters)
Cooler
3.7L/ 4x4 10,100 lbs (4 581 kg) 64 Sq. Ft. (5.94 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) 500 lbs (227 kg)
Automatic square meters)
w/Cooler
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it
should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety
Information” in this section.
Trailer and Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
5
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, or GCWR, ratings.
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” WARNING!
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle. Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
Towing Requirements as safe as possible:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended: Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that is will not shift during travel. When traile-
CAUTION! ring cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage have an accident.
your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to ratings are not exceeded:
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
1. GVWR
sion, chassis structure, or tires.
2. GTW
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the 3. GAWR
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough 5
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
slack for turning corners.
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. percentage of total trailer weight).
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
Towing Requirements — Tires
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
“P” (Park). With a manual transmission, shift the − Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
transmission into “R” (Reverse). Always, block or spare tire.
9chock9 the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
“Tires–General Information” in this section for infor-
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
procedures.
personal injury.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
pressures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor- a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
mation” in this section for information on tread wear brake controller is not required.
indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa- lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
tion” in this section for information on replacement lbs (907 kg).
tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring

CAUTION!
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they motoring safety.
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness. 5
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-

draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7- Pin Connector
4 - Pin Connector
Towing Tips If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, minutes of continuous operation, then change the auto-
and backing the trailer in an area located away from matic transmission fluid and filter according to the
heavy traffic. interval specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing” in the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch Towing Tips — TOW/HAUL
slippage. To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, press the “TOW HAUL” button when driving in
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position “2” 5
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
on more severe grades. Refer to “Automatic Transmis-
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, you will
sion” in this section for additional information.
want to activate the TOW/HAUL feature. Refer to “Au-
tomatic Transmission” in this section for additional in- Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
formation. Equipped)
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL feature while operating − Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im-
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
prove performance and extend transmission life by re-
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
ducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
you can get back to cruising speed.
will also provide better engine braking.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
maximize fuel efficiency. MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing Tips — Cooling System Towing – 2WD Models
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Recreational towing is not allowed.
heating, take the following actions:
CAUTION!
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can result
in neutral and increase engine idle speed. in severe transmission damage.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Towing — 4WD Models
− Air Conditioning The transfer case must be shifted into Neutral (N) for
Turn off temporarily. recreational towing. The Neutral (N) selection button is
− Refer to “Cooling System” under “Maintenance Pro- located at the top of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into
cedures” in Section 7 of this manual for more informa- and out of transfer case Neutral (N) can take place with
tion. the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• The Automatic Transmission must be in “P” (Park) You or others could be injured if you leave the
position for recreational towing. The Manual vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Transmission (if equipped) must be in gear (for Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
example, 4th gear) for recreational towing. Failure parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
to follow these procedures can cause severe trans- disengages both the front driveshaft and rear drive-
mission and/or transfer case damage. shaft from the powertrain and it will allow the
• Internal damage to the transmission or transfer vehicle to move despite the transmission position.
The parking brake should always be applied when
5
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing. the driver is not in the vehicle.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into Neutral” to be cer- Shifting into Neutral (N)
tain that the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N). Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle
Otherwise, internal damage will result. for recreational towing:
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
damaged. 2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 11. Shut OFF the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal. 12. Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF posi-
tion.
5. Shift the transmission to “N” (Neutral) (automatic
transmission), or depress the clutch pedal (manual trans- 13. Shift the transmission into “P” (Park) (automatic
mission). transmission), or shift into 4th gear (manual transmis-
sion).
6. Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object to
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for 14. Attach the vehicle to a tow vehicle with a tow bar.
4 seconds. After the shift is complete, and the Neutral (N)
15. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
light turns on, release the Neutral (N) button.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements for shifting the
8. Shift the automatic transmission into “R” (Reverse). transfer case. If these requirements are not met prior to
depressing the Neutral (N) selection button or while
9. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
the shift attempt is in process, then the Neutral (N)
that there is no vehicle movement.
indicator light will flash continuously until all require-
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 with the transmission in “D” ments are met or until the Neutral (N) button is
(Drive) (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual released.
transmission).
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a Shifting Out of Neutral (N)
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON for normal usage:
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
2. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
• Flashing Neutral (N) position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met. 3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position (if it
has been moved or the engine has been started).
CAUTION! 5
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans- start the engine.
mission is shifted into “P” (Park) with the transfer 5. Depress the brake pedal.
case in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With
the transfer case in Neutral (N), ensure that the 6. Shift the transmission into “N” (Neutral) (automatic
engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into transmission), or depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-
“P” (Park). mission).
7. Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object to
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button.
Release the Neutral (N) button after the Neutral (N)
indicator light turns off (approximately 1 second). After NOTE:

the Neutral (N) button is released, the transfer case will • Steps 1 through 6 are requirements for shifting the
shift to the position identified by the selector switch. transfer case. If these requirements not met prior to
depressing the Neutral (N) selection button or while
the shift attempt is in process, then all of the mode
9. Shift the transmission into “D” (Drive) (automatic position indicator lights will flash continuously until
transmission) or into 1st gear and momentarily release all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N)
the clutch (manual transmission) to verify that the trans- button is released.
fer case has engaged.
10. Set the parking brake. shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch in not in the ON
11. Shift the transmission into “P” (Park) (automatic
position, the shift will not take place and no position
transmission), or into “N” (Neutral) (manual transmis-
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
sion).
• Flashing Neutral (N) position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
m Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 m Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 6
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

CAUTION!
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac- Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
tion. your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
• On the highways — Slow down. pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in N back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
(Neutral), but do not increase engine idle speed. the “H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down engine off immediately, and call for service.
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
Control to maximum heat, the Mode Control to floor, and
the Fan Control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location

The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
WARNING! in the cargo compartment behind a trim cover on the left
rear trim panel. The latch is located at the bottom of the
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. trim cover.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
6
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Storage Location

Spare Tire Stowage

The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the
Lug Wrench to rotate the nut counter clockwise until the
spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to
allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire

• Turn the ignition to the LOCK position.

CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the WARNING!

jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
other power tools is not recommended and they can
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
damage the winch.
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable, and pull it through the center of the wheel.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Preparations For Jacking
• Block both the front and rear 6
• Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the of the wheel diagonally oppo-
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery site of the jacking position.
areas. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left
• Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in
rear wheel.
PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual
transmission). • Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove spare tire.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket. As-
semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten-
sion, and then to the lug wrench.
4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front tires, place it in
the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be
changed. For the rear tires, place it under the axle by the Front Jacking Location
wheel to be changed. Position the jack handle on the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle less stable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
lug nuts with cone-shaped end toward wheel. Lightly 6
Rear Jacking Location tighten the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right. off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface has been lowered.
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct JUMP STARTING
wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a WARNING!
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is
station. raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be hurt
by the fan.
10. Lower the jack to it’s fully closed position.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this
WARNING! way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If
the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid
to contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when
the places provided. attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately
with large quantities of water.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper loca- • A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explo-
sive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes.
tions.
• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an
output that exceeds 12 volts.
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such 3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmis-
as watchbands or bracelets that might make an unin- sion in PARK (or NEUTRAL for manual transmission),
tended electrical contact. and turn the ignition OFF for both vehicles.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park 4. Turn OFF the heater, radio and all unnecessary elec-
that vehicle within booster cable reach, but without trical loads.
allowing the vehicles to touch.
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive
battery post. Connect the other end of the same cable to
WARNING!
the positive terminal of the booster battery.
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this 6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
could establish a ground connection and personal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of 6
injury could result. the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you
have a good contact on the engine ground.
7. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi-

WARNING!
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
or towing. position.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the 8. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
could cause the battery to explode. the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
• During cold weather when temperatures are be- 9. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
low freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

WARNING!
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
Any procedure other than above could result in: damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom-
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out bers of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated
the battery vent; brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery under tow must be observed.
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
6
TOWING METHOD
NOTE: The transmission & transfer case must be in “N” Neutral under any towing configuration.
Model Flat Towing (all four Flat Bed Towing Front Wheels Rear Wheels Raised,
wheels on the (Recommended for Raised, Rear Wheels Front Wheels on the
ground) speeds > 30 mph (48 on the Ground Ground
km/h) & distances >
15 miles (24 km)
and/or when using a
vehicle trailer [All
four wheels sus-
pended off the
ground])
2 Wheel Drive Rear driveshaft re- All four wheels sus- Speed < 30 mph (48 Speed < 30 mph (48
moved pended off the km/h) & distance < km/h) & distance <
ground 15 miles (24 km) 15 miles (24 km)
4 Wheel Drive Yes All four wheels sus- Not Recommended Not Recommended
pended off the
ground
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m 3.7L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 399 ▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 406
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 ▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 7
m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
m Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 409
m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . 426
▫ Driveline And Steering Component ▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Windshield & Rear Window Washers . . . . . . . 414 m Sky Slidert Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 ▫ Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 ▫ General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 421 ▫ Additional Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 ▫ Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 ▫ Weather Strip Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual m Fuses (Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Transmission (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
m Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 ▫ Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal, And Back-Up
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
m Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
m Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
▫ Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
m Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Front Turn Signal And Front Side Marker
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
7
3.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
transmission control systems. When these systems are emission control system. It could also affect fuel
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
sions well within current government regulations. formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system • If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
also store diagnostic codes and other information to verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Immediate service is required.
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not 7
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light)
“gASCAP” message will display in the instrument clus- is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
ter. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is heard. and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight- for testing.
ened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
message. If the problem persists, the message will appear
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
(MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. 1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
or start the engine. illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
this test over.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
bulb check.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
happen: system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated 7
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
proceed to the I/M station. vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
WARNING!
Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in- You can be badly injured working on or around a
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
warranty. service job, take your vehicle to a competent
DEALER SERVICE mechanic.
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
include detailed service information for your vehicle. services determined by the engineers who designed your
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure vehicle.
yourself.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
against you. However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is

observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always CAUTION!
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the 7
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
top of the safe zone on these engines.
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this been certified by the American
manual for information on this system. Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
API Certified engine oils.
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recom- Engine Oil Viscosity
mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS- temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
6395. starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants, which do not have both, the engine oil Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
number should not be used. oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Synthetic Engine Oils
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed. Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
Materials Added to Engine Oil
oil change.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to Engine Oil Filter Selection
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace- 7
tives. ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopart Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension Spark Plugs

Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
tensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments are mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
should be inspected periodically and replaced if re- replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
quired. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-
failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery lytic converter. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
failure. Parts” in this section for the proper type of spark plug for
use in your vehicle.
Inspect belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or
frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of dam- Engine Air Cleaner Filter
age, which could result in belt failure. Also, check belt Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
routing to make sure there is no interference between the manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance inter-
belts and other engine components. See your authorized vals.
dealer for service.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
Fuel Filter
WARNING!
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary See your authorized dealer for service.
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is Catalytic Converter
near the engine compartment before starting the The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in catalyst as an emission control device.
serious personal injury.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure 7
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In materials that can burn. Such materials might be
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin- where your exhaust system can contact anything that
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe can burn.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, safely
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control bring the vehicle to a complete stop, turn off the engine,
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune up to
against you. manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained imme-
diately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Crankcase Emission Control System
age: Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
motion.
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
vehicle.
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec- plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
tors disconnected for prolonged periods.
Maintenance-Free Battery
• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi- You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tions. tenance required. 7
• Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid battery that the positive cable is attached to the
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean positive post and the negative cable is attached to
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
diately with large amounts of water. battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep terminal posts and free of corrosion.
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
booster battery or any other booster source with an the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
clamps to touch each other. use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage as
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories battery damage can result.
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
Air Conditioner Maintenance

WARNING!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
at the start of each warm season. This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
time. unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
additional warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant 7
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling Power Steering — Fluid Check

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar- Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro- service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
using recovery and recycling equipment. DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
WARNING!
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, and Refrigerants. Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
manual for A/C Air Filter service intervals. not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is

operating or personal injury may result.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism,
NOTE: Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
steering pump may make noise for a short period of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
This noise should be considered normal, and does not in year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
any way damage the steering system. amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Driveline and Steering Component Lubrication
All driveline and steering components are sealed and do Windshield Wiper Blades
not require lubrication. Driveshafts are not serviceable. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a 7
Body Lubrication
mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film
seat tracks, doors, tailgate and hood hinges, should be
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods Windshield & Rear Window Washers
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use The windshield and rear window washers share the same
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front
from a dry windshield. of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the
residual water.
blade.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
NOTE: Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
specific installation instructions. Many wiper blade re-
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
placements fit multiple vehicles.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addi-

WARNING!
tion, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is
Commercially available windshield washer solvents raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around WARNING!
the washer solution.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Exhaust System Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO. Refer
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust to “Exhaust Gas” in the “Safety Tips” section of this
system. manual.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust 7

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
Cooling System Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
WARNING! months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera- equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
ture controlled and can start at any time the leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
ignition switch is in the ON position. garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C con-
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant denser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the entire system for leaks.
radiator is hot.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the coolant will begin to drain from the coolant

CAUTION!
recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS • Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
HOT. engine coolants, may result in engine damage and
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in Sec- emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
tion 8 of this manual. fied coolant as soon as possible.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount • Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-base
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old they may not be compatible with the radiator
antifreeze solution. engine coolant and may plug the radiator. 7
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Selection of Coolant
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Re-
lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
Adding Coolant • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles (160 the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this cooling system.
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
the vehicle is operated.
When adding coolant:
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopart engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula changes.
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
exceed 70%) if temperatures below 234°F (237°C) are radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
anticipated.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal of Used Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
WARNING! local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre- containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald- Coolant Level
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
the system is hot or under pressure. determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

engine idling, and warm to normal operating tempera- 7
ture, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
gine damage may result.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating • Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
be checked once a month.
coolant recovery bottle. If coolant needs to be added,
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be pro-
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do tected against freezing.
not overfill.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
Points To Remember level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
sure tested for leaks.
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- corrosion protection of your engine, which contains
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to aluminum components.
enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the collapsed.
condenser clean, also.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install present.
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
mileage, and increased emissions.
Fuel System
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’s
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
tubes, special connectors, connections, and clamps have
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
unique material characteristics that provide adequate
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline. 7
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
tubes, connections, and clamps, or their equivalent in
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Brake System brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particu-
system components should be inspected periodically. lar attention should be made to examining those hose
Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Mainte- surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
nance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual. manifold.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
WARNING!
collapsed.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting are secure and no leaks are present.
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and NOTE:
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full • Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid, and
braking capacity in an emergency. brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations
to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore,
oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily
Brake and Power Steering System Hoses an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance, when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and based on leakage.
• Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hy- forming underhood services.
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking,
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose can
voir.
take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
WARNING! cause leaking in the system.
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
hoses replaced immediately. leak and a checkup may be needed. 7
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check section for the correct fluid type.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in Do not allow petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission
point than the recommended product or a brake (If Equipped)
fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS specifica- The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
tion may result in sudden brake failure during volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
hard prolonged braking. You could have an reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only
accident. manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed correct fluid type.
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Changes

Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the
Fluid Level Check
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in Sec-
Your vehicle is equipped with a capped dipstick tube that
tion 8 of this manual.
is sealed and it should not be tampered with. Your
authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
fluid level is set properly. is disassembled for any reason.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “police, taxi, fleet, off-road,
CAUTION!
or frequent trailer towing” maintenance interval if appli-
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- cable.
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration Special Additives
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that product and its performance may be impaired by supple- 7
recommended by the manufacturer will result in mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this sec- policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
tion for the correct fluid type. leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped Frequency of Fluid Change

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
Fluid Level Check
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
fluid becomes contaminated with water. Change the fluid
point not more than 3/16” (4.76 mm) below the bottom of
immediately if contaminated with water.
the hole.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “trailer tow, snow plow,
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
heavy load, taxi, police, commercial service, off-road,
Lubricant Selection desert, or sustained high speeds during hot weather”
Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual trans- maintenance interval if applicable.
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Transfer Case
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole (1) when the vehicle is in a level position.
CAUTION!
Do not over-tighten the plugs. You could damage

them and cause a leak.
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for the correct fluid type.
Frequency of Fluid Change
Adding Fluid Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of 7
begins to run out of the hole. the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
fluid becomes contaminated with water. Change the fluid
Draining Fluid immediately if contaminated with water.
First remove fill plug (2), then drain plug (3). Recom-
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is
15–25 ft.lbs. (20–34 N·m).
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “police, taxi, fleet, off-road, the life of the vehicle. Lubricant changes are not neces-
or frequent trailer towing” maintenance interval if appli- sary unless the lubricant becomes contaminated with
cable. water. Change the lubricant immediately if contaminated
with water.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “police, taxi, fleet, off-road,
Fluid Level Check
or frequent trailer towing” maintenance interval if appli-
The lubricant level should be at bottom edge of the oil fill
cable.
hole.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
specified above. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
Lubricant Selection
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
Use only manufacturer’s recommended lubricant. Refer
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
for the correct fluid type.
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
Frequency of Fluid Change road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
Under normal operating conditions, the lubricant in-
stalled at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will • Bird droppings.
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
Washing
body protection.
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
hicle in the shade using Mopart Car Wash or a mild
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
resistance built into your vehicle.
clear water.
What Causes Corrosion?
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
lated on your vehicle, use Mopart Super Kleen Bug
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
and Tar Remover to remove.
The most common causes are:
• Use Mopart Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains,
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation. and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint. 7
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities. finish.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

CAUTION!
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner.
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will • If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
scratch metal and painted surfaces. similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
decals. sibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
Special Care
packaged and sealed.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
a month.
• Use Mopart Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
of the doors, rocker panels, and tailgate must be kept
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
clear and open.
vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care use protectants or other products, which may cause
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a restore the low glare surface.
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
Cleaning Interior Trim
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopart
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and Mopar Total
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
Clean, and if necessary, follow with Mopar Spot & Stain
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
Remover. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopart or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic Cleaning Leather Upholstery
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ Mopart Total Clean is specifically recommended for
protective finish. leather upholstery.
Interior Care Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular 7
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
Instrument Panel Cover
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopart Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
ammonia-based cleaners to clean leather upholstery. Ap-
• For tough stains, apply Mopart Total Clean or a mild
plication of a leather conditioner is not required to
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
maintain the original condition.
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove the soap
residue.
WARNING!
• For grease stains, apply Mopart Multi-Purpose
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in Use a fresh, damp towel to remove the soap residue.
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tialst products.
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Cleaning Headlights
Equipped Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
manner:
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
with a clean, dry towel.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing. must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Glass Surfaces
rag.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopart Glass Cleaner or any commercial 2. Dry with a soft tissue.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Seat Belt Maintenance
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. 7
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Dry with a soft tissue. Do not remove
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
the belts from the car to wash them.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the General Cleaning
buckles do not work properly. Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles.
SKY SLIDERT TOP CARE
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended. If hand washing:
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and • Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun.
appearance, and make successive cleaning easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the • Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top.
top and storage compartment. • Wash the top with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush,
Washing and a mild soap solution such as liquid dishwashing
Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth soap. Do not use detergent.
system is preferred. • Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
CAUTION!
• Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap
Avoid pointing a high-pressure hand held spay wand and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking
directly at the sides of the top, as this can damage the on painted and chrome surfaces.
seal and force water past the weather strips.
• Allow the top to dry before opening. Vacuuming the Additional Cleaning Procedure
top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and stains, apply Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner #
delete streaks in the material. 4883061 to the complete stain, extending 2 inches (50
mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in
• Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stub-
all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
born stains. If stains persist, contact your local dealer-
Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still
ship for further suggestions.
apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain
is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm
CAUTION!
water. Let the top dry before lowering it.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches. Protection
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol- For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect the
vents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always acrylic (cloth) top periodically. A fabric protectant such as 7
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering Scotchguardt is suggested. The top should be clean and
it into the storage area. dry before application of the protectant.
CAUTION!
Avoid getting Scotchguardt on the surrounding

weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to
these items might occur.
Weather Strip Care

Lubricate the weather strips periodically with Mopar
Weather Strip Lubricant (part number 4773427), to keep
them soft and pliable.
FUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE) Integrated Power Module (TIPM)

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located Cavity Cartridge Mini Description
in the engine compartment near the battery. This center Fuse Fuse
contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label
J1 — — —
that identifies each component is printed on the inside of
J2 30 Amp — Transfer Case Module
the cover.
Pink - if equipped
Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
J3 40 Amp — Rear Door Modules J11 — — —
Green J13 60 Amp — Ignition Off Draw
J4 25 Amp — Driver Door Node Yellow (IOD)
White J14 40 Amp — EBL (Rear Window
J5 25 Amp — Passenger Door Node Green Defogger) - if
White equipped
J6 40 Amp — Anti-Lock Brake Sys- J15 — — —
Green tem (ABS) Pump/ESP J17 40 Amp — Starter Solenoid
- if equipped Green
J7 30 Amp — Anti-Lock Brake Sys- J18 20 Amp — Powertrain Control
Pink tem (ABS) Valve/ESP Blue Module (PCM) Trans- 7
- if equipped mission Relay
J8 40 Amp — Power Seats - if J19 60 Amp — Radiator Fan
Green equipped Yellow
J9 40 Amp — PZEV/Flex Fuel - if J20 30 Amp — Front Wiper
Green equipped Pink
J10 — — —

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
J21 20 Amp — Front Washer/Rear M6 — 20 Amp Power Outlet #1 (ci-
Blue Washer - if equipped Yellow gar lighter)/Rain Sen-
J22 25 Amp — Sunroof Module - if sor - if equipped/
White equipped Trailer Tow - if
M1 — 15 Amp Stop Light Switch equipped
Blue Feed — Center High M7 — 20 Amp Power Outlet #2
Mounted Stop Light Yellow (BATT/ACC SELECT)
(CHMSL) M8 — 20 Amp Front Heated Seats -
M2 — 20 Amp Trailer Lighting - if Yellow if equipped
Yellow equipped M9 — — —
M3 — — — M10 — 15 Amp Hands Free Module
M4 — 10 Amp Trailer Tow - if Blue (HFM) – if equipped/
Red equipped Universal Garage
M5 — 25 Amp Power Inverter – if Door Opener (UGDO)
Natural equipped – if equipped/Vanity
Light

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M11 — 10 Amp Automatic Tempera- M15 — 20 Amp Multi-Function Con-
Red ture Control (ATC) - Yellow trol Switch/Cabin
if equipped Compartment Node
M12 — 30 Amp Radio/Amplifier - if (CCN)/Steering Col-
Green equipped umn Control Module
M13 — 20 Amp Cabin Compartment (SCM)/Rear View
Yellow Node (CCN)/Wireless Mirror/Tire Pressure
Control Module Monitor (TPM) - if
(WCM)/Multi- equipped/IR Sensor -
Function Control if equipped/Transfer
Switch Case Module - if
M14 — — —
equipped 7
M16 — 10 Amp Occupant Restraint
Red Controller (ORC)

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M17 — 15 Amp Exterior Lighting — M20 — 15 Amp Interior Lighting/
Blue Left Front Park & Blue Steering Wheel
Side Marker, Left Tail Switches - if
& Running, License equipped/Switch
Lights Bank/Electronic Ve-
M18 — 15 Amp Exterior Lighting — hicle Information
Blue Right Front Park & Center (EVIC) - if
Side Marker, Right equipped
Tail & Running Lights M21 — 20 Amp Auto Shut Down
M19 — 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Yellow (ASD) #3
Natural (ASD) #1 & #2 M22 — 10 Amp Right Horn (Hi/Low)
Red
M23 — 10 Amp Left Horn (Hi/Low)
Red
M25 — 20 Amp Fuel Pump
Yellow

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M26 — 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch/ M32 — 10 Amp Occupant Restraint
Red Driver Window Red Controller (ORC)
Switch M33 — 10 Amp Powertrain Control
M27 — 10 Amp Ignition Switch/ Red Module (PCM)
Red Wireless Control M34 — 10 Amp Park Assist Module -
Module (WCM)/ Red if equipped/Heating,
Steering Column Lock Ventilation, & Air
- if equipped Conditioning (HVAC)
M28 — 10 Amp Powertrain Control Module - if
Red Module (PCM) equipped/Compass
M29 — 10 Amp Occupant Classifica- Module - if equipped
Red tion Module (OCM) M35 — 10 Amp Heated Mirrors - if 7
M30 — 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module - Red equipped
Blue if equipped/ M36 — — —
Diagnostic Link
M31 — 20 Amp Back-Up Lights
Yellow
Cavity Cartridge Mini Description CAUTION!

Fuse Fuse
M37 — 10 Amp Anti-Lock Brake Sys- • When installing the Integrated Power Module
Red tem (ABS)/Electronic cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
Stability Program erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
(ESP) Module/Stop may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Light Switch Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
M38 — 25 Amp Door & Liftgate failure.
Natural Lock/Unlock Motors
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlight
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2 1. Open the hood.
Overhead Console Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLW214–2A 2. Reach behind the headlight housing to access the
Reading Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2 headlight bulb lock ring.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb No. 3. Firmly grasp the lock ring and rotate it counterclock-
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9008 H13 wise to unlock it.
Front Park/Turn Signal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757AK 4. Remove the bulb and connector assembly from the
Front Side Marker Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 headlight housing.
Back-Up Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Center High Mounted Stop Light 5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED then connect the replacement bulb. 7
(Serviced at Dealer)
Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H10 9145
License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Tail/Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Rear Turn Signal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757AK
Front Turn Signal and Front Side Marker Lights

CAUTION!
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right to
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil access the left front turn signal or side marker. Turn the
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the steering wheel all the way to the left to access the right
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the front turn signal or side marker.
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Remove three push-pins from the wheel-well liner.
3. Gently flex the wheel-well liner forward to access the
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the bulb.
headlight housing and rotate the lock ring clockwise to
4. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
lock it in place.
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
7. Close the hood. 5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
6. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Reposition the wheel-well liner and install the push-
pins.
Front Fog Light 5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the
fog light housing, and rotate the connector clockwise to
1. Open the hood.
lock it in place.
2. Reach behind the headlight housing to access the bulb.
6. Close the hood.
3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal, and Back-Up Lights
the bulb and socket assembly from the fog light housing.
1. Open the liftgate.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb. 2. Remove the screws that fasten the taillight housing to
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
3. Pull the taillight housing straight back to separate it
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil from the vehicle.
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. 7
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Remove the two screws that fasten the back plate to 8. Install the back plate and screws into the taillight
the taillight housing. housing.
6. Separate the back plate from the taillight housing. 9. Connect the electrical connector.
7. Pull the appropriate bulb(s) out of the back plate and 10. Install the taillight housing and screws.
insert the replacement bulb(s).
11. Close the liftgate.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (approximate)
3.7 Liter Engine 19.5 Gallons 73.8 Liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified 5 Qts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System *
Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent. 14 Qts 13 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap
for correct SAE grade.
Spark Plugs ZFR6F-11 (Gap.043 in [1.1 mm])
Oil Filter Mopart 5281090 or equivalent.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Mopart Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent (meeting the re-
quirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-9224)
Transfer Case Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle SAE 80W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder/Manual Mopart DOT 3, SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. If DOT 3 brake
Transmission Clutch System fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
m Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 452 ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . 455
S
m Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
N
T The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
E type must be done at the times or mileages specified to time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
N assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
A On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
N control system. These, and all other maintenance services
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
C included in this manual, should be done to provide best
E played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
S tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
H driving. in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
E
D will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
U
L malfunction is suspected. Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
E indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
individual using any automotive part, which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453 M
A
NOTE: this manual or under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” under I
N
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in Section 3 of this T
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil manual. E
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even N
At Each Stop for Fuel A
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi- N
nated. • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully C
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the C
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. H
E
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if D
comes first. U
required. L
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message E
after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled S
oil change is performed by someone other than your 8
dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Oil Change Required” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of
A
I Once a Month At Each Oil Change
N
T • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
E
N damage.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
A
N • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
• Check the manual transmission fluid level.
C as required.
E
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake CAUTION!
S master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
C
H needed. Failure to perform the required maintenance items
E may result in damage to the vehicle.
D • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
U operation.
L
E
S
8
A
Required Maintenance Intervals I
N
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage T
E
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) N
A
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months N
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6 C
E
Rotate the tires. 6,000 10 000 6
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, S
inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if 12,000 20 000 12 C
necessary. H
E
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12 D
Replace the air conditioning air filter (if equipped). 12,000 20 000 12 U
L
Inspect the front & rear axle lubricant. Change the lu- E
bricant if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off- 18,000 30 000 18 S
road, or frequent trailer towing. 8
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at
24,000 40 000 24
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspec-
24,000 40 000 24
tion at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
A
I
N Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
T are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
E
N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
A
N Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot 24,000 40 000 24
C seals, and replace if necessary.
E Replace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30
S Change the manual transmission fluid if using your
C vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow
H plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
E 30,000 50 000 30
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation, or
D
U more then 50% of your driving is at sustained high
L speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
E Inspect the transfer case fluid. 30,000 50 000 30
S
Replace the spark plugs. 30,000 50 000 30
8 Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or 60,000 100 000 60
frequent trailer towing.
A
I
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage N
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) T
E
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months N
A
Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for N
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or fre- 60,000 100 000 60 C
quent trailer towing. E
Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary. 90,000 150 000 90 S
Flush and replace the engine coolant. 102,000 170 000 60 C
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter. 120,000 200 000 120 H
E
Replace the accessory drive belt(s). 120,000 200 000 120 D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
N WARNING!
T
E
N You can be badly injured working on or around a
A motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
N you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
C
E you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
S mechanic.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 463 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 9
460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests

YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
Prepare For The Appointment
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
work to be performed may not be covered by the
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
pointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem. The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
Prepare A List your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident, Warranty service must be done by an authorized
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
service advisor know. that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 461
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to • Vehicle identification number
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
manner.
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
P.O. Box 21–8004
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
this process.
Phone: (800) 992-1997
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you Phone: (800) 465–2001
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Center should include the following information: Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
9
• Dealership name
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
Impaired (TDD/TTY) tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
Service Contract your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
You may have purchased a service contract for your those documents.
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
concerns.
date. If you have any questions about your service
MOPART PARTS
WARNING!
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals vehicle operating at its best.
known to the State of California to cause cancer and REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
this vehicle. individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer. 9
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), To order the following manuals, you may use either the
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. for an order form.
In Canada: NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
• Service Manuals.
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to These comprehensive service manuals provide the
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations information that students and professional technicians
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
3V9. maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals. Call Toll Free at:

Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations, • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show Or
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list • www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
of all tools and equipment.
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips. 9
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
TIRE QUALITY GRADES in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
The following describes the tire grading categories estab- characteristics and climate.
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
Traction Grades
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
of the tires on your car.
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
Requirements in Addition to These Grades. concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
WARNING!
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex- The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends peak traction characteristics.
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and heat buildup and possible tire failure.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
9
INDEX
10
470 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,81,204

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . 195,310,315 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 418 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,204
Adding Rear Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,181 Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 406 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418,447
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,315
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,412 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411,412 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260,264,411 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,338 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
INDEX 471
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ... . . . 169
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . 169
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,32 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . 449
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . .... . . . 449
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 201,209
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 264 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Automatic Transaxle Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,425 Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,449 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,81
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Brake Assist Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . 287 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 10
472 INDEX
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,315 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,449 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,358
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 79 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,443 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 259
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,212 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92,237,239
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Caps, Filler Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
INDEX 473
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,212
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,213
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70,74,76 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 418
Cleaning Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,239,243 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,419
Clutch Fluid Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Clutch Interlocking Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Command-Trac Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 417,447,448 10
474 INDEX
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . 198 Dipsticks

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . 428 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Crankcase Emission Control System .. . . . . . . . . 409 Disposal
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . 202 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . 172 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . 460 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,304
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,262,268 On Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 When to Use Low Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 169
INDEX 475
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,448
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,358
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 147 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 196,324 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 192 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 206 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Emergency, In Case of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,447,448
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,209,404
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 400,452 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,447
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 10
476 INDEX
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,412

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405,448
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 65 Flashers
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,136,194,444,445
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,81,358,415 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,415 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,428
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,432 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Filters Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
INDEX 477
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 448 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,136,194,445 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Four Wheel Drive Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,448
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,294,298,300 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,298 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 378 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 378 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,400
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 10
478 INDEX
Gauges Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,291 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,26,118,355 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 137
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,143
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,365 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,364 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 92,237,239 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Hard Drive (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Hazard Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
INDEX 479
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 137 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,338
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,322 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Hitches Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,190
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 155 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,422 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,138
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385,388
Indicator, Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 10
480 INDEX
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,443
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,133
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,81,204
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,328
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,137
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,324,328
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 192
INDEX 481
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,194,445 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . 196,197,200,295,301 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . 139
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,443 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,143 Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,193 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 193
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 196,322 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 190,346
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,190 Tow/Haul Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,324,328
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,301
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,133,136,194,444,445
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 190
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 193 Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 10
482 INDEX
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 193,400
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,426
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,449
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
INDEX 483
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Odometer

Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,209
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,209
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,448
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402,463 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,209,404
MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405,448
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,447
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,448 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,447 10
484 INDEX
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399,400 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92,237,239
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 92,237,239
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 333
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,285 Port
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,384 Universal Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 464 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Power
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Sunroof (Sky Slider) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,434
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
INDEX 485
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412,449 Rear Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Pretensioners Rear Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Reception, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 418 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,239,254 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Remote Control
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 10
486 INDEX
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 258 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,239,254
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 201,209 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,81
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 46
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Roof Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,76
Sky Slider Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,434 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
INDEX 487
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Selec-Trac Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,239,243
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Shift Lock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,283
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,204 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,294,298,300
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 417,448 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 10
488 INDEX
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 271 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,136,194,444,445 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Sky Slider Power Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,434 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Steering
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,412
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,448 Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Specifications Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,448 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,277 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Sun Roof (Sky Slider Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,434
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 52
INDEX 489
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 264 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 198 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,334
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 333 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,337,466 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 10
490 INDEX
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Tow/Haul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,286 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,449
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,364 Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,283
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,426
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 378 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,316 Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,364 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . 155
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
INDEX 491
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,213

Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,361
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,136,194,444,445 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . 92,237
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,181
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,145,414
Water
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 10
492 INDEX
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,163,168 Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,262,268
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,145,414 YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 432
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION ROLLOVER WARNING HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A
WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key RemovalKey-In-Ignition ReminderSENTRY KEY Replacement KeysCustomer Key ProgrammingGeneral InformationSTEERING WHEEL LOCK - IF EQUIPPED To Manually Lock the Steering WheelTo Release the Steering Wheel
LockSECURITY ALARM SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Rearming of the SystemTo Arm the SystemTo Disarm the SystemILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY To Unlock the Doors and LiftgateTo Lock the Doors and LiftgateTo Unlatch the Liftgate Flip-Up
WindowUsing the Panic AlarmProgramming Additional TransmittersBattery ReplacementGeneral InformationREMOTE STARTING SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED How To Use Remote StartDOOR LOCKS Manual Door LocksPower Door LocksChild-Protection Door Lock System
(Rear Doors)WINDOWS Power WindowsWind BuffetingLIFTGATE OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ProcedureSeat Belt PretensionersEnhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)Automatic Locking Mode - If Equipped
Energy Management FeatureSeat Belts and Pregnant WomenSeat Belt ExtenderDriver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - AirbagChild RestraintENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS SAFETY TIPS Transporting PassengersLock Your Vehicle
Exhaust GasSafety Checks You Should Make Inside The VehiclePeriodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night MirrorAutomatic Dimming Mirror - If EquippedOutside
MirrorsExterior Mirrors Folding Feature - If EquippedPower Remote Control MirrorsHeated Remote Control Mirrors - If EquippedIlluminated Vanity Mirrors - If EquippedHANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) - IF EQUIPPED OperationPhone Call FeaturesUConnect
System FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThings You Should Know About Your UConnect SystemGeneral InformationSEATS Manual Front Seat AdjustmentsPower Seat - If EquippedHead RestraintsHeated Seats - If Equipped60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold
Flat FeatureDRIVER MEMORY SEAT - IF EQUIPPED Programming The Memory FeatureLinking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless (RKE) Transmitter to the Memory FeatureMemory Position RecallEasy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat Only)TO OPEN AND
CLOSE THE HOOD LIGHTS Exterior and Interior Lighting ControlHeadlights and Parking LightsAutomatic Headlights - If EquippedHeadlights with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only)Headlight Time Delay - If EquippedDaytime Running Lights (DRL) - If Equipped
Lights-On ReminderFog Lights - If EquippedTurn SignalsHighbeam/Lowbeam Select SwitchFlash to PassInterior LightsWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper SystemMist FeatureHeadlights with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only)Rain Sensing
Wipers - If EquippedWindshield WashersAdding Washer FluidTILT STEERING COLUMN ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL - IF EQUIPPED Electronic Speed Control OperationTo ActivateTo Set At A Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary The Speed Setting
To Accelerate For PassingREAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED System Usage PrecautionsEnabling and Disabling the SystemSystem OperationGARAGE DOOR OPENER - IF EQUIPPED Programming HomeLinkGate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingUsing
HomeLinkReprogramming a Single HomeLink ButtonSecurityTroubleshooting TipsGeneral InformationPOWER SUNROOF - IF EQUIPPED Opening Sunroof - ExpressClosing Sunroof - ExpressPinch Protect FeaturePinch Protect OverrideVenting Sunroof - ExpressSunshade
OperationWind BuffetingSunroof MaintenanceIgnition Off OperationSKY SLIDER FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF Sky Slider Usage PrecautionsPower Top ControlOpening the Sky SliderClosing the Sky SliderAnti-Pinch Protect FeatureWind BuffetingSky Slider Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OffPOWER INVERTER - If EQUIPPED CUP HOLDERS STORAGE Front Storage CompartmentConsole Storage CompartmentCARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Load FloorREAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer - If EquippedRear Window Defroster - If EquippedROOF LUGGAGE RACK - IF EQUIPPED INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) - IF EQUIPPED Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) DisplaysOil Change RequiredTrip FunctionsCompass DisplayTelephone (UConnect) - If EquippedPersonal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast SignalsTwo Types of SignalsElectrical DisturbancesAM ReceptionFM ReceptionSALES CODE REQ - AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio
ModeOperation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)Notes On Playing MP3/WMA FilesLIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)SALES CODE RER - MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM - IF
EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - Satellite RadioOperating Instructions - Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped)Clock Setting ProcedureSALES CODE RES - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio
ModeOperation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio PlayNotes On Playing MP3 FilesLIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)SATELLITE RADIO (RSC) - IF EQUIPPED (RER/REQ/REN RADIOS ONLY) System Activation
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ENS/SID)Selecting Satellite ModeSatellite AntennaReception QualityOperating Instructions - Satellite ModeOperating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If Equipped)Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System
(VES) (If Equipped)REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS - IF EQUIPPED Right-Hand Switch FunctionsLeft-Hand Switch Functions for Radio OperationLeft-Hand Switch Functions for Media (i.e. CD) OperationCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - If Equipped Operating TipsSTARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic TransmissionManual Transmission - If EquippedNormal StartingExtreme Cold Weather
(below -20 degrees F or -29 degrees C)If Engine Fails to StartAfter StartingENGINE BLOCK HEATER - IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Shift Lock Manual Override - If EquippedBrake/Transmission Interlock System4-Speed Automatic TransmissionMANUAL
TRANSMISSION - IF EQUIPPED Clutch Interlocking Ignition System6-Speed Manual TransmissionFOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION MP1522 Command-Trac Transfer Case - If EquippedMP3022 Selec-Trac II Transfer Case - If EquippedON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4WD Low RangeDriving Through WaterDriving In Snow, Mud and SandHill ClimbingTraction DownhillAfter Driving Off-RoadPARKING BRAKE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM POWER STEERING ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
SYSTEM ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)TCS (Traction Control System)BAS (Brake Assist System)ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)TSC (Trailer Sway Control) - If EquippedHSA (Hill Start Assist)HDC (Hill Descent Control) - If EquippedESP (Electronic Stability Program)
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator LightTIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading and Tire PressureTIRES - GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresTire Pressures for High Speed
OperationRadial-Ply TiresTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife of TireReplacement TiresAlignment and BalanceTIRE CHAINS TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) - IF EQUIPPED Base System - If EquippedPremium
System - If EquippedGeneral InformationFUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated GasolineGasoline/Oxygenate BlendsMMT In GasolineMaterials Added to FuelFuel System CautionsCarbon Monoxide WarningsADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)Loose Fuel Filler Cap
MessageVEHICLE LOADING Certification LabelTRAILER TOWING Common Towing DefinitionsTrailer Hitch ClassificationTrailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)Trailer and Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsRECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing - 2WD ModelsTowing - 4WD ModelsWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack LocationSpare Tire StowageSpare Tire RemovalPreparations For JackingJacking
InstructionsJUMP STARTING TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM - OBD II Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageEMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
REPLACEMENT PARTS DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilEngine Oil FilterDrive Belts - Check Condition and TensionSpark PlugsEngine Air Cleaner FilterFuel FilterCatalytic ConverterCrankcase Emission Control SystemMaintenance-Free
BatteryAir Conditioner MaintenanceA/C Air Filter - If EquippedPower Steering - Fluid CheckDriveline and Steering Component LubricationBody LubricationWindshield Wiper BladesWindshield and Rear Window WashersExhaust SystemCooling SystemHoses and
Vacuum/Vapor HarnessesFuel SystemBrake SystemClutch Hydraulic System - Manual Transmission (If Equipped)Automatic TransmissionManual Transmission - If EquippedTransfer CaseFront/Rear Axle FluidAppearance Care And Protection From CorrosionSKY SLIDER
TOP CARE WashingGeneral CleaningAdditional Cleaning ProcedureProtectionWeather Strip CareFUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE) REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT HeadlightFront Turn Signal and Front Side Marker LightsFront Fog Light
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal, and Back-Up LightsFLUID CAPACITIES FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS EngineChassisMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Required Maintenance
IntervalsIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The AppointmentPrepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsIF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles
Only) MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In CanadaPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesINDEX

2008 Liberty 1st

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Liberty 1st

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Liberty 1st

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

INTRODUCTION ROLLOVER WARNING

belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate Flip-Up Window . . . . .24 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental ▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Replacement Keys NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

How To Use Remote Start To Enter Remote Start Mode

Manual Lock Plunger

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move

Inserting Ignition Key

WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door

Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in

Auto Down Feature

2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Programming

How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal

The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This

Along with the seat belts, the front airbags provide

4. Do not lean against the door or window, airbags will

Airbag System Components • Front Passenger Seat Track Position Sensors

NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride

NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need

• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

Data Parameters that May Be Recorded: • Transmission gear selection

Infants and Child Restraints

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or

Tether Strap Mounting

means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

Tether Strap Mounting

m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ Flash To Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Using HomeLinkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

m Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the

Manual Rearview Mirror

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped

Power Mirror Switches

Models with Express Window Feature Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped